JP2019180600A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 enabling games is provided, comprising presentation display means 5, detection means 31B capable of detecting the operation of a player, and presentation control means 120 for controlling performances of presentations related to the games. The presentation control means 120 can perform an operation presentation for displaying in the presentation display means 5 an operation promotion display to a player and performing a presentation display on the basis of detecting the operation of the player; and an operation suggestion presentation for displaying in the presentation display means 5 an operation suggestion display for suggesting that the operation presentation is to be performed. The operation suggestion presentation includes: a success pattern in which a plurality of operation suggestion displays is moved and displayed and then, via an overlapping display, the operation promotion display is performed; and a failure pattern in which the plurality of operation suggestion displays is moved and displayed and then, via the overlapping display, a failure-emphasizing display is performed. A period corresponding to the failure-emphasizing display in the failure pattern is longer than a period corresponding to the overlapping display in the failure pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

  Some conventional gaming machines can execute an effect (motion effect) that suggests that a big hit game is executed based on detection of an operation of an effect button (player's action) by the player. In such a gaming machine, the player displays after a suggestion image (operation suggestion display) suggesting that an effect suggesting that the big hit game is executed is displayed on the effect display device (effect display means). When an image (operation promotion display) that prompts the user to operate the effect button is displayed (success pattern), and a suggestion image (operation suggestion display) that suggests that an effect suggesting that the big hit game is executed is executed ) Is displayed (failure pattern) when an image prompting the player to operate the effect button (motion promotion display) is not displayed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2015-226625A

  However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that if the action promotion display is not displayed after the action suggestion display is displayed, the game entertainment cannot be improved.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Effect display means (for example, effect display device 5);
A detection means (for example, push button 31B or stick controller 31A) capable of detecting the player's action;
Effect control means for controlling the execution of effects related to the game (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect symbol variation start process and the effect symbol variation process),
With
The effect control means displays an action display based on the fact that the action display for the player (for example, the image of the push button 31B as the action display) is displayed on the effect display means and the player's action is detected. An operation for displaying an effect (for example, an effect after the third operation) and an operation suggestion display (for example, the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image) suggesting that the operation effect is executed on the effect display means. Suggestive effects (for example, a portion that displays the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the display area of the effect display device 5) can be executed,
The motion suggestion effect includes a success pattern (for example, pattern 1 in the third reach effect) in which the motion promotion display is performed via a superimposed display after a plurality of motion suggestion displays are moved and displayed, and a plurality of the motion suggestion indications are moved. Including a failure pattern (for example, pattern 4 in the third reach production) that performs failure emphasis display through superimposed display after display,
A period corresponding to the failure emphasis display in the failure pattern is longer than a period corresponding to the superimposed display in the failure pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 27A, a period L2 corresponding to the failure emphasis display is A portion longer than the period L1 in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 as operation suggestion images),
further,
There is provided a specific effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a specific effect for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051) capable of executing a specific effect for maintaining the effect mode.
As the specific effects, there are a period for maintaining the first mode (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the vertical direction) and a period for maintaining the second mode (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction). Different productions can be performed,
The degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player differs according to the length of the period for maintaining the second mode (for example, when the specific effect is executed, the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the landscape orientation. The longer the time played, the higher the expectation of jackpots)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve amusement interest by increasing the period of failure emphasis display and emphasizing disappointment. Further, attention can also be paid to the period during which the effect mode is maintained.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The production control means includes
After displaying the specific operation suggestion display, the operation promotion display corresponding to the specific operation suggestion display is displayed and the operation effect is executed (for example, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are generated) After displaying in the center of the display area of the display device 5, the image 230 of the push button 31B as an operation promotion image is displayed in the center of the display area to execute the first operation effect)
While the specific operation suggestion display is being displayed, the operation effect that does not correspond to the specific operation suggestion display can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that performs the button operation effect at the right end of the display area)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or means 2,
In the failure pattern, a plurality of the operation suggestion displays are moved so as to gather in the specific display area of the effect display means, and then the plurality of operation suggestion displays are moved to a display area outside the specific display area ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31 </ b> B as the operation suggestion images are displayed on the left and right edges of the display area of the effect display device 5. After moving from the center toward the center, the part to be dispersed toward the left and right edges of the display area)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since a plurality of action suggestion displays are moved to a display area outside the specific display area, the failure pattern can be more emphasized, and the motivation to display the action promotion display is further increased. it can.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or means 2,
In the failure pattern, a plurality of the operation suggestion displays are moved so as to gather in the specific display area of the effect display means, and then all the operation suggestion displays are erased in the specific display area (for example, When the three reach effect is executed with the pattern 4, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are moved from the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center, and then the display is performed. (Part of deleting the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion image in the center of the area)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, all the action suggestion indications are erased, giving the player a surprise and more emphasis on the failure pattern, so it is even more motivated to display the action promotion indication it can.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 4,
The motion suggestion effect can be displayed in the specific display area after the plurality of motion suggestion displays are moved and displayed in the effect display means (for example, the third reach effect is pattern 1). Alternatively, when the pattern 4 is executed, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are moved from the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center, and then the center of the display area is displayed. A portion where the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are displayed in an overlapping manner)
The period during which the plurality of operation suggestion displays are moved and displayed is longer than the period during which the plurality of operation suggestion displays are displayed within the specific display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 27A). The period L during which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are moved from the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center is two pushes as the operation suggestion images at the center of the display area. (A part longer than the period L1 in which the image 210 of the button 31B is displayed in duplicate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to secure the movement display period of the operation suggestion display, so it is possible to increase the attention to the operation suggestion display and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 5,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
The production control means is the first mode (for example, the image 230 of the white push button 31B as the operation promotion image in the modified example 7) or the second mode having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode. (For example, the operation promotion display of the red push button 31B as the operation promotion image in the modified example 7) can be displayed,
The production control means includes
When the motion promotion display of the first mode is displayed, the motion suggestion display corresponding to the first mode can be displayed (for example, as shown in the modified example 7, a white push as an operation promotion image) In the case where the image 230 of the button 31B is displayed, a part capable of displaying the image 210 of the white push button 31B as the operation suggesting image)
When the motion promotion display of the second mode is displayed, the motion suggestion display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed (for example, as shown in the modified example 7, a red push as an operation promotion image) In the case where the image 230 of the button 31B is displayed, a portion capable of displaying the image 210 of the red push button 31B as the operation suggesting image)
In the success pattern, when the operation promotion display of the second mode is displayed, the operation suggestion display corresponding to the first mode can be displayed (for example, as shown in Modification 7, When the three reach effect is executed in any one of the patterns 1 to 3, even when the operation promoting image 230 is displayed as the image 230 of the red push button 31B as the operation promoting image, the white as the operation suggesting image is displayed. The part that displays the image 210 of the push button 31B)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised and the interest of the motion promotion display can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 6,
In the failure pattern, the period during which the failure emphasis display is performed is longer than the period during which a plurality of the operation suggestion displays are displayed within the specific display area of the effect display means (for example, FIG. 27A). As shown in FIG. 5, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 from the period L1 in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed in an overlapping manner. (The part where the period L2 during which the display is stopped at the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 as the failure emphasis display is longer)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by emphasizing disappointment by the failure emphasis display, it is possible to further arouse the willingness to display the action promotion display.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 7,
In the failure pattern, the size of the display area where the failure emphasis display is displayed on the effect display means is larger than the size of the display area where the action promotion display is displayed on the effect display means (for example, FIG. 32). As shown in (D), when the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion image is displayed at the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, the images of the two push buttons 31B are displayed in duplicate. Therefore, the display area when the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 is one image of the push button 31B. As shown in (H), the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 as the failure emphasis display. In this case, the image of one push button 31B is displayed at the right end of the display area, and the image of the other push button 31B is displayed at the left end of the display area. (The display area when the images of the two push buttons 31B are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 is a portion corresponding to two images of these push buttons 31B)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the display area of the failure emphasis display is larger than the display area of the operation promotion display, it can be emphasized that the operation promotion display is not displayed, so that the willingness to display the operation promotion display is increased. Can be further aroused.

The gaming machine of means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 8,
The effect control means is capable of executing a plurality of motion effects with different types of effect display (for example, as the first post-operation effect, the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character and the friend character is defeated by the enemy character) And a part where the teammate character draws with the enemy character)
During the execution of the action suggestion effect, a plurality of effect type suggestion indications suggesting the type of effect display of the action effect can be displayed on the effect display means (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion capable of displaying a message image 220 of “Victory!” That suggests winning the character and a message image 220 of “Draw!” That suggests that the ally character draws from the enemy character)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, before the motion promotion display is displayed, the effect type suggestion display is displayed together with the operation suggestion display, and the type of the effect display of the motion effect is suggested in advance. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of effect display to be displayed, and to improve the game entertainment.

A gaming machine of means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 9,
Control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
The effect control means is a predetermined period before the operation promotion display is displayed (for example, a period from when the second reach effect is started until the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed). ) Can be executed (for example, a portion that displays the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image before the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promoting image).
As the operation promotion display, the operation promotion display of the first mode (for example, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image having a size of “small”) and the advantageous state are controlled as compared with the first mode. The operation promotion display of the second aspect having a high ratio (for example, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image having a size of “large”) can be displayed,
There are multiple modes of the operation suggestion display (for example, the image 210 of the white push button 31B, the image 210 of the blue push button 31B, and the image 210 of the red push button 31B as the operation suggestion image),
During the execution of the operation suggestion effect, the mode of the operation suggestion display can be changed to a different mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image is changed from white to blue. → red and changeable part),
The rate at which the motion promotion display is displayed in the second mode differs depending on the mode of the motion suggestion display (for example, the most operation is performed when the image 210 of the red push button 31B is displayed as the operation suggestion image). When the image 230 of the “large” push button 31B is displayed as the promotion image is high, and the image 210 of the white push button 31B is displayed as the operation suggestion image, the “large” push button as the operation promotion image is the most. (The rate at which 31B image 230 is displayed is low)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change in the display mode of the suggestion display, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

A gaming machine according to means 11 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 10,
The production control means includes
After displaying a specific action suggestion display (for example, the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as an operation suggestion image), an operation promotion display corresponding to the specific operation suggestion display is displayed to execute the operation effect. (For example, after the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, the image 230 of the push buttons 31B as the operation promoting image is displayed in the center of the display area. And the part that performs the first post-operation effect)
While the specific operation suggestion display is displayed, a second operation effect (for example, a button operation effect shown in the second modification) different from the first operation effect suggested by the specific operation suggestion display is executed. Is possible,
The second operation effect is executed under a predetermined restriction (for example, as shown in FIG. 37E, the button operation effect is displayed in the effect display device so as not to overlap with the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image. 5) Displayed at the right end of the display area
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming difficult to understand.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include the inventions according to the following means 12 to 17. Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that can execute an effect that maintains the aspect of the effect as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576. However, although the above-described conventional gaming machine can execute an effect that maintains the aspect of the effect, it cannot make attention to a period during which the aspect of the effect is maintained. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can be noticed even during a period in which the aspect of the effect is maintained.

  In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the means 12 according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is a specification that maintains the aspect of the performance. A specific effect means capable of executing an effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a specific effect for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051), and the period for maintaining the first mode as the specific effect (sub It is possible to execute an effect in which the period in which the image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction) and the period in which the second mode is maintained (the period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction) can be executed, and the second mode is maintained. The degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state varies depending on the length of the period to be performed (for example, when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the landscape orientation when the specific effect is executed) The longer, the higher the jackpot expected level, and the like).

  According to this configuration, attention can be paid to the period in which the effect mode is maintained.

  The expectation that the gaming machine of the means 13 is controlled to the advantageous state when the second aspect is maintained in the gaming machine of the means 12 rather than when the first aspect is maintained. (E.g., even when the count-up notice effect with the same count number is the same), the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained horizontally. The expected degree of jackpot of the count-up notice effect that is performed is higher than the expected degree of jackpot of the count-up notice effect that is executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical orientation without executing the specific effect, etc. ).

  According to this structure, when the aspect of a specific effect is maintained in the 2nd aspect, the expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state can be raised by performing another effect.

  The gaming machine of the means 14 is a notification effect means (for example, a sub-image) capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the aspect of the specific effect is the second aspect in the gaming machine described in the means 12 or 13. An effect control CPU 90120 or the like that can execute a notification effect for notifying that the display device 9051 is turned sideways may be further provided.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the aspect of the specific effect is the second aspect.

  The gaming machine of means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 14, wherein the specific effect is stepwise from the first mode to the second mode corresponding to a plurality of variable displays. The changing effects can be executed (for example, the hold change effect execution patterns HP4′-1 to HP4′-2, HP5′-1 to HP5′-2, HP6′-1 to HP6′-2 shown in FIG. 60, HP7′-1 to HP7′-2, etc.).

  According to this structure, interest can be improved over a plurality of variable displays.

  The gaming machine of means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 15, wherein predetermined effect means capable of executing predetermined effects in a plurality of modes (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control capable of executing a call notice effect) ), And the ratio of the aspect of the specific effect to the second aspect varies depending on which aspect of the predetermined effect is executed (for example, when a call notice effect is executed, When the character call is “I don't want to do it”, a specific effect is executed, and there is a high possibility that the sub-image display device 9051 will be in the landscape orientation).

  According to this configuration, attention can be paid to the predetermined effect.

  The gaming machine of the means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 12 to 16, wherein an effect of changing to the first aspect after changing from the first aspect to the second aspect during one variable display. Can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, a plurality of effects in which the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated in the vertical direction after the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated in the horizontal direction are displayed in a single variable display. Etc.) may be performed.

  According to this structure, the interest during one variable display can be improved.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot classification determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the contents of various jackpots. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect design change start process. (A)-(C) is a figure which shows the determination ratio of reach production, (D) is a figure which shows the content of each reach production. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production | presentation route in a 1st reach production. (A) is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display mode of the image of a push button as an operation promotion image in a 2nd reach production, (B) is a display of the image of a push button as an operation suggestion image in a 2nd reach production. It is a figure which shows the mode change frequency. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the display pattern of the image of a push button as an operation suggestion image in a 3rd reach production, (C) is a display of the image of a push button as an operation suggestion image of each display pattern. It is a figure which shows the content. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st operation post production execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd post operation presentation execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the post-third operation effect execution process. It is a timing chart for every display pattern in the 3rd reach production. It is a timing chart for every display pattern in the 3rd reach production. It is a figure which shows the display mode in the production | presentation display apparatus in the case of performing a 1st reach production. It is a figure which shows the display mode in the production | presentation display apparatus in the case of performing a 1st reach production. It is a figure which shows the display mode in the effect display apparatus in the case of performing a 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode in the effect display apparatus in the case of performing a 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode in an effect display apparatus in the case of performing a 3rd reach effect in the pattern 1 or the putter. It is a figure which shows the display mode in an effect display apparatus in the case of performing a 3rd reach effect in the pattern 1 or the putter. It is a figure which shows the display mode in the production | presentation display apparatus in the case of performing a 3rd reach production in the pattern 2 or the putter 5. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode in the production | presentation display apparatus in the case of performing a 3rd reach production in the pattern 3 or the pattern 6. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode in the effect display apparatus in the case of performing a 2nd reach effect in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode in an effect display apparatus in the case of performing the odor prefetch notice effect in the modification 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode in the effect display apparatus in the case of performing a 2nd reach effect in the modification 3. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in one embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko gaming machine of FIG. It is a figure showing an example of main production control commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the processing content performed in command analysis processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding change effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of a holding | maintenance change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of an effect production. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a pending | holding change effect execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a pending | holding change effect execution pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of a call notice effect. It is a figure which shows the example of execution decision of count-up notice effect. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of a specific production. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a specific production execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the pseudo | simulation continuous production execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the count-up notice effect execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of an effect at the time of development. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 1 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be described as the rear (back) side. In addition, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is an opposing surface that faces the player when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step in the flowchart according to the present embodiment, for example, a portion indicated as “step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine) is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 (gauge board) that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 3 (base frame) that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. ). The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is composed of, for example, a 7 segment LED or a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) and the like. A special symbol (also referred to as “special”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of types of special symbols are assigned with corresponding symbol numbers. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . In the present embodiment, the special symbol is exemplified as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of characters, symbols, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. The design may be a combination of a plurality of dot displays that does not have a certain rule and is difficult to identify or cannot be identified.

  Both the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”). May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display 4B in the special game are respectively displayed. In the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, for example, the effect symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. And, in response to the start of any one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, changes in the effect symbols (also referred to as decorative symbols) (for example, vertical scroll display) are started. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special symbol game, the effect display devices 5L, 5C, and 5R in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) that is the result of variation display of the production symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display 4B. In synchronism with the game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a definite effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols are derived and displayed by stopping display of identification information such as effect symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and ending the variable display. . On the other hand, during the variation display from the start of the variation display of the production symbol to the display of the definite production symbol that is the variation display result, the variation rate of the production symbol becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not deterministically displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the effect symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include a complete stop display of the effect symbol for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. The production symbols are not limited to eight types, and any number may be used as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a combination of “big hit” and a combination of “out of” can be configured (for example, seven types or 9 types).

  After the variation display of the effect symbols is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the finalized effect symbols that are the variation display results are derived and displayed. , For example, a scroll display is performed in which the symbol number flows from top to bottom sequentially from the smallest to the largest, and when the effect symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The effect symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” effect symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number. When the effect symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the effect symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  A first reserved memory display area 5D and a second reserved memory display area 5U are set in two places on the left and right of the display area of the effect display device 5. In the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U, the hold memory display for displaying the variable hold memory number (the special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is specified.

  Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In the present embodiment, the stored storage display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening is a round white display, and the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening ( The reserved storage display generated on the basis of the start winning due to the entry) is similarly a round white display.

  In the following description, the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U may be referred to as a reserved display area, and the number of reserved memories is the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display. It can be recognized by the number of reserved storage displays displayed in the area 5U. Further, a display in which the hold storage display is gathered may be referred to as a hold display.

  Whether the hold display in the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U is generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, The display mode (for example, display color and shape) may be varied depending on whether the game ball is generated based on the start winning by passing (entering) the game winning opening. In the present embodiment, “execution” and “execution” are synonymous.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper and lower parts of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B together with the hold storage display area. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure hold memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display holding memory number obtained by adding the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number is also referred to as a total holding memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In the case of performing the effect using the effect display device 5 in this way, for example, In recent years, there has been a diversification of production styles, such as production where the contents of the production, including variable display, disappear for a moment from the screen, or production where the movable object blocks all or part of the screen. ing. For this reason, even if the display area on the effect display device 5 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, for the purpose of eliminating the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the current variation display state is present, the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol, and the normal symbol is displayed on the effect display device 5. A 4 symbol display area may be provided. These 4 symbols are displayed in a 4th symbol for the first special symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and for the second special symbol in synchronization with the variation in the second special symbol. It is only necessary to display the variation of the fourth symbol. Note that the 4th symbol is always displayed in a variable manner with a constant operation, and is not disappeared from the screen or shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  Below the effect display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a second starting prize opening is formed as a starting region (second starting region).

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 "), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 "), the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variable display) so that it can be variably displayed. Such a normal symbol variation display is referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect LED 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of the shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, the game ball paid out as a prize ball or the game ball paid out by lending is held (stored) so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launcher. A dish (a hit ball supply dish) is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The member that forms the lower plate is provided with a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 35 </ b> A for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower plate body or the like below the stick controller 31 </ b> A. For example, the controller sensor unit 35A includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect the pressing operation from the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B that detects a pressing operation performed by the player on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 31B is disposed.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and an LED control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and produces the effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect LED 9 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 is used for effects such as display operation in the effect display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect LED 9 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The LED control board 14 is a control board for LED output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect LED 9 and the like are turned on / off. An LED driver circuit or the like is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. Further, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display 4A, a second special symbol display 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a general figure hold indicator 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B. Command 81XXH is an effect that is displayed in a varying manner in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the special symbol change display in the special game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variation display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates a variation display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “out of” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The different EXT data is set in accordance with the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types of jackpot types in the case of "".

  In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variation display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable variable big hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the variation of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time shortening control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed by the time shortening control. On the other hand, a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which probability variation control is not performed is used. In addition, the command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high probability low base state, timeless probability variation state) in which probability variation control is performed while time variation control is not performed, and command 9503H is probability variation and time variation control. It is assumed that the fourth gaming state designation command corresponds to the gaming state in which the control is performed together (highly accurate high base state, time-varying probability changing state).

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big prize opening notifying that it is a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  In the jackpot start designation command or jackpot end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result designation command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type decision result. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command or jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. The first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A is established. The command B200H indicates that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. Based on this, the second start opening prize designation command is used to notify that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command B5XXH is an effect control command for notifying the remaining number of time reductions (the number of fluctuations). By setting EXT data corresponding to the remaining number of time reductions (the number of fluctuations), the remaining number of time reductions (Variation count) is notified.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the second reserved memory display area 5U or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the first starting condition is satisfied by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type (probability variation, non-probability variation or sudden probability) as the determination result at the time of winning. The command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of “non-reach”, “super-reach”, or “other” as a determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102) that provides an area, a CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 It comprises a random number circuit 104 that performs and an I / O 105 (Input / Outputport 105).

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 sends the input of various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, The numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for display result determination is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR4 may be counted.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65536”. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is used to determine the big hit type as “probable big hit A”, “probable big hit B”, or “non-probable” when the variation display result is “big hit”. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”.

  The random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result is used to determine whether the fluctuation display result in the normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per normal map” or “displaced from the normal map”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “out of”, the variation display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”. Corresponding to the case where the result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out of variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the deviation fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “out of”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β,... The normal reach fluctuation pattern may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β that are the super reach fluctuation patterns. . In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which super reach reach production such as super reach α and super reach β in this embodiment is performed, the variation pattern in which super reach β super reach production is performed. However, the special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set higher. In the reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by determining the type of the fluctuation pattern first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. Therefore, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine the variation pattern type. The variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after first determining the variation pattern type from the random value. It is also possible to determine the emissions.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited thereto. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the second special figure.

  The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, the special figure display result depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “out”.

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result as to whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as the big hit gaming state. It is data for determination to be assigned. In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), more judgment values than the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) are “big hit”. It is assigned to the special map display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as the “big hit” in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) to control the big hit gaming state. Then, compared to the probability determined (about 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability of determining to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit” is higher (about 1/30 in the present embodiment). ). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state compared to the normal state or the short time state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state so as to increase.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”, one of a plurality of jackpot types is selected based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol on which the variation display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol) Depending on whether it is a special game by the symbol display 4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change big hit A”, “probability big hit B” Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types.

  Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time-shortening control are executed after the jackpot game state is finished. The probability variation big hit A and the probability variation big hit B that shift to the high accuracy base state, and the non-probability big hit that shifts to the low accuracy high base state by executing only the time reduction control after the big hit gaming state is set.

  In the big hit gaming state with “probable big hit A” and the big hit gaming state with “non-probable big hit”, as described above, there are 16 rounds of changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player (so-called 16 rounds), which is a recurring normally open jackpot. On the other hand, in the big hit gaming state with “probable big hit B”, as described above, the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated five times (so-called five rounds). It is a short-term open jackpot. Thus, “probability variation big hit A” may be referred to as 16 rounds (16R) probability variation big hit, and “probability variation big hit B” may be referred to as five rounds (5R) probability variation big hit.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-shortening control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the probability changing big hit A and the probability changing big hit B are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that has occurred again is the probable big hit A or the probable big hit B, the high-precision control and the short-time control are executed again after the big hit gaming state ends, so the big hit gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time-shortening control that is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state due to “non-probable big hit” is that a special number game is executed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) or the predetermined number of special figure games The game is ended by being in a big hit gaming state before is executed.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 7A, “probable big hit A” and “probable big hit B” depend on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure. Allocation of judgment value for jackpot type is different. That is, when the variation special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “81” to “100”) are assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B” with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variation special chart is the second special chart, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied. Thus, the ratio of determining the big hit type as “probability big hit B” with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the big hit type is “probable big hit B” and it is not determined to control the short-term open big hit state with a small number of rounds. In the gaming state where the game ball is likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent short-term open big hit states with few prize balls obtained. Can be prevented.

  In the example of setting the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7A, whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart is assigned to the judgment value for the “non-probable variation” jackpot type. Regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the probability of being a non-probable big hit and the probability of being a probable big hit are the same. ing.

  Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value to “probability variation big hit B” differs depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure, and “probability big hit A” The allocation of the judgment value to "" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability big hit A" with a large number of rounds, the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. It is set so that it is easier to determine the case of the case than the case of the first special drawing.

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a predetermined range of judgment values different from those when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure are assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B”. May be. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than the case where the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B”. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is “big hit”, and the special figure display result is “out”. The deviation variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance is prepared in advance.

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns of normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3) are included. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. In the present embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type “probability big hit A” or “probability big hit B”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “non-probable big hit”. When the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it is not “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B” when the super reach β variation pattern is executed. It can raise the player's expectation.

  Further, the deviation variation pattern determination table is used when the number of reserved storage patterns is 1 or less, and when the total number of reserved storage is 2 to 4 is used. Outlier variation pattern determination table B, outlier variation pattern determination table C used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8, and when the gaming state is a high base state in which time-shortening control is performed A deviation variation pattern determination table D used for the above is prepared in advance.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach variation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α variation variation pattern (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern (PA2-3) of reach β out of a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the fluctuation pattern determining random pattern MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination (PA2-2) and the super-reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). It has been. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and super A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the fluctuation pattern determining random pattern MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination (PA2-2) and the super-reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). It has been. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control. (PA2-2), a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter fluctuation time than the non-shortage non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and further the fluctuation pattern (PA1). The non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time than -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach deviation variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. When the start prize is won, it becomes difficult to generate useless start prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and there is no non-reach fluctuation By determining the pattern (PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed by increasing the time for the variable display.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the game state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A has not started yet although the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the start winning (first start winning) has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 are held data. Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of the result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to make a big hit.

  The second special figure storage unit 151B has been started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a start winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The holding data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 are held data. Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of the result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing of the game ball through (entering) the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passed (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The universal figure storage unit 151 </ b> C stores the general game hold information that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure hold storage unit 151C associates the hold numbers with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the software 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by applying predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing to all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number which updates the numerical data which shows the random value independently of RAM122 which performs, the display control part 123 which performs the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the production | presentation display apparatus 5, and CPU120 for production control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the receiving control CPU 120 for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the effect controlling CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating LED data is connected to the LED control board 14.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 12, as with the main board 11, for example, random values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining various types of effects such as a notice effect are set.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. Yes.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 is used for controlling the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect LED 9, the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be stored is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern during special figure change, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effect symbol variation display operation, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations not accompanied by effect symbol variation display Has been. The notice effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the special-fluctuation effect control pattern, for example, for each change pattern that executes the reach effect, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect modes in each reach effect are different may be included.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is provided. For example, the production control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the effect display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, in the effect control counter setting unit, data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters is stored.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, a reception command buffer at the start winning prize for performing the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U is set in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. . The reception command buffer at the time of the start winning prize has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved memory number of the first special figure reserved memory. Each storage area stores data indicating the presence / absence of a start prize (specifically, “0” indicating no start prize and “1” indicating the presence of a start prize). The data of the start winning reception command buffer is described later in response to reception of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, and reception of the first variation start command and the second variation start command. The first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold are updated on the basis of the data of the received command buffer at the time of the start winning prize after the update in the hold display update process (S72, see FIG. 12) in the effect control process to be performed. The on-hold storage display in the storage display area 5U is updated.

  Specifically, when the first start opening winning designation command is received based on the start winning at the first start winning opening, a round white is displayed on the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D. While a new display is added, when the first variation start command is received based on the newly started variation of the first special figure, among the held storage displays in the first reserved storage display area 5D, The high-order (the first memory that holds the winning start) will be erased, and the other round white display will be shifted (moved) in the specified direction (for example, left). Update. Similarly, when the second start opening winning designation command is received based on the start winning at the second start winning opening, a round white display is displayed on the hold storage display in the second hold storage display area 5U. When a second change start command is received based on the fact that the second special figure has started to be newly added, the highest level among the hold storage displays in the second hold storage display area 5U ( Update the hold display so that the round white display of the hold memory that was awarded first is erased and the other round white display is shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, left). To do.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 displays the variation of the normal symbol such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2. For example, the normal symbol display 20 is set based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has been completed. The usual game is started.

  In this ordinary game, after a normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time which is a normal symbol change time elapses, a fixed normal symbol which is a normal symbol change display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “out of normal symbol”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is “per normal”, the enlargement / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. On the basis of the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A is started. In addition, the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state, the special game by the second special symbol display 4B is started.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, after the variation display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed after starting the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol Determining and displaying a definite special symbol (a special graph display result) as a result. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ Out of place ". In addition, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. When the predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) as a result of the predetermined display is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to control to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is the off symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a loss symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 4B. However, a special symbol common to both of the special symbol games may be a big hit symbol or an off symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” that are the big hit symbols, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a big hit symbol corresponding to the probability variation big hit A, which will be described later, A special symbol indicating a number is a jackpot symbol corresponding to a probability variation jackpot B described later. In the big hit game state (normally open big hit state) that is controlled after the big hit symbol of “3” or “7” is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the big prize opening door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is A special variable prize is awarded by opening the big prize opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. A round of changing the ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed a first number of times (for example, 16 times). The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  Of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is a jackpot symbol corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot described later, and is a special variable The grand prize opening door of the winning ball apparatus 7 is used for a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By setting the open state, the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state (open state) that is advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed the first number of times (for example, 16 times) as with the probability change big hit A. .

  Control is performed after a special symbol indicating the number “5” is derived from among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. In the big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state), the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in each round (the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the big winning opening door) The upper limit) is the same as the predetermined period in the normal open big hit state, but the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is the first number in the normal open big hit state ( For example, it is repeatedly executed a second number of times (for example, 5 times) less than 16 times. The short-term open big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In these short-term open big hit states, the number of rounds is exemplified as the second number of 5 times, but the round number is the same as the first number (for example, 16 times) in the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in each round after a predetermined number (for example, 6) (the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the big winning opening door) ) May be set to a second period (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normal open big hit state, so that the substantial number of rounds may be made smaller than that in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds is smaller than that in the normal open big hit state. In addition, in these short-term open big hit states, it is practically impossible to get a ball (prize ball) by setting the open period of the big prize opening to the second period (such as 0.1 second) for all rounds. It is good also as a big hit game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period in which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is different from the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. The second period is shorter and the second round number is less than the first round number in the normal open round specific game state. It is sufficient if the number of balls (prize balls) that can be acquired is less than the big hit state.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special figure games using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B, the variation display of the effect symbols is started. The period from the start of the variation display of the effect symbols to the end of the variation display due to the stop display of the confirmed effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Then, the variation display state of the effect symbol may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state refers to an effect design (“reach variation design”) that has not been stopped yet when the effect design that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R, etc.) in advance. The remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect) that has not been stopped yet when the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating the alphanumeric character of “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the presentation symbols are changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination.

  In response to the reach state, the variation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. Or change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image that is different from the production symbol, or change the variation mode of the production symbol, so that the production operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed May be. Such an effect operation such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the change mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). Note that the reach effect includes not only the display operation in the effect display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect LED 9, etc. before reaching the reach state. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are set in advance. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the fluctuation display result may be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (expected degree of big hit) Becomes higher. Further, in the present embodiment, in the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β, when super reach β appears, the fluctuation display result is “big hit” compared to when super reach α appears. The expectation degree of jackpot is high (the expectation degree of jackpot: super reach β> super reach α> normal reach).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in reach, the variation time is set such that super reach β> super reach α> normal reach (see FIG. 5), and the longer the variation time, the larger the hit. Expectation is getting higher.

  During the variation display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, there is a possibility that the variation display state of the production symbol will be the reach state, the variation display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. A variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo-run” may be executed to notify the player in accordance with a variable display mode of the effect symbol. It is only necessary to determine whether or not these “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” variation display effects should be executed in response to the variation pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Whether or not the “slip” variation display effect is to be executed on the effect control board 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side.

  During the variation display of the production symbol, unlike the variation display production such as the reach production, for example, a predetermined production image is displayed, an image display that is a message, voice output, LED lighting, etc. Due to the presentation operation different from the fluctuation display operation, the fluctuation display state of the production symbol may be in the reach state, the reach production by the super reach may be executed, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit” There is a case where a notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility of becoming a warning is executed. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the change display state of the effect symbol after the effect symbol display is started in all of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. May be executed (started) before the reach state is reached (before the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R). Further, the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that the variation display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state.

  The notice effect may include a hold display notice effect. The hold display announcement effect is based on the change in the display mode such as the hold display of the special game before the start of the change display that is subject to the advance notice. This is a suggested announcement. In particular, the effect of continuously notifying the possibility that the result of the variable display will be a “big hit” over the variable display of the effect symbol that is executed multiple times in response to multiple special figure games is a continuous notice effect (continuous It is also called production. In addition, while the special figure game is executed once, the effect design is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the effect display for changing the effect design again (pseudo continuous change, re-change) is performed a predetermined number of times. In a game machine that performs a “pseudo-continuous” variation display effect that makes it appear as if multiple variation displays are being performed, the variation display result is “big hit” over the pseudo multiple variation displays. A notice effect for continuously notifying the possibility and the like is also included in the continuous notice effect (continuous effect).

  When the special symbol that becomes the outlier symbol is stopped (derived) as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the effect symbol does not become the reach state after the effect symbol variation display is started. In addition, a definite effect design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect design is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variable display mode when the variation display result is “out of”.

  When a special symbol that becomes an outlier symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes reach after the effect symbol variation display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined out-of-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the variation display state of the production symbol has reached the reach state when the jackpot symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that is a jackpot symbol as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probable variable big hit combination”) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the non-probable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol without the reach effect being executed.

  The confirmed effect symbol which is a normal big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is variably displayed in, for example, the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the effect display device 5. Among the effect symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, any one of the effect symbols having the even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “middle” and “right”. The effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the finalized symbol of the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variable jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. It should be noted that the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variation jackpot combination) may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed effect symbol without executing the reach effect. Based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol change display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. In the short-time control, so-called electric chew support is performed in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is increased as described later. Here, the normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, after the power is turned on) The same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed is performed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, out of the special symbol that becomes the big hit symbol, when the probability variable big hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variation display state of the production symbol is the reach state. Correspondingly, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, the definite effect symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations May stop appearing. It should be noted that the probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed effect symbol without the reach effect being executed. The confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination is, for example, a symbol number “1” that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. Among the effect symbols of “8”, the effect symbol whose symbol number is “7” is a predetermined effective line in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the top. The effect symbol having the symbol number “7” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is referred to as a probability variation symbol. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that become short-term open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variation jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the change display state of the production symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, the predetermined probable big hit combination is selected from a plurality of types of big hit combinations. The confirmed effect design may be stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed effect symbol without the reach effect being executed. The confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination is, for example, a symbol number “1” that is variably displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. ~ Among the effect symbols of “8”, any one of the effect symbols having the odd number “1”, “3”, “5” other than the symbol number “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right” As long as it is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect symbols having the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, and “5” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are referred to as probability variation symbols in the same manner as the effect symbol “7” described above. In addition, when the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol. Good.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed effect symbol is a normal big hit combination or a probable big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game will have a "big hit" fluctuation display result. This is referred to as a variation display mode of “probability variation” (also referred to as “big hit type”). In this embodiment, among the big hit types of “probability change”, the control is set to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that “7 big” is displayed as the confirmed special symbol and the result is “big hit”. After that, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control. On the other hand, among the big hit types of “probable change”, it is controlled to the short-open big hit state based on the fact that “5 big” is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, and the short-term open big hit state is controlled. At the same time, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the fluctuation display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation control may be ended when the condition that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state again after the big hit gaming state is ended. Similar to the time reduction control, the probability variation control is ended when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times the same as the time reduction number or 90 times different from the time reduction number) are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. May be. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time-shortening control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control (electricity support control) that is advantageous to the player by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied is performed. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening along with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. In this embodiment, the gaming state to be controlled is not set, but the probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time-shortening control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. Further, only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, the probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control or the high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that the special-figure game can be executed frequently and the fluctuation display result in each special-figure game will be a "big hit" As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol in which the confirmed effect symbol is a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the effect symbols that are usually a big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5, for example, “left ”,“ Middle ”,“ right ”effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the same effect symbols are changed again in a state of being aligned, and an effect symbol (probability variable symbol) that is a probable big hit combination and a normal big hit One of the effect symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the normal jackpot combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display effect symbol It is sufficient that a re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the rendition effect is a confirmed effect that becomes a promiscuous big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display design A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays the symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  After a definitive effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination (non-probable variation jackpot combination) is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the execution of a round in the jackpot gaming state, one of the rounds ends in the jackpot gaming state Probability of whether or not to control to the probabilistic state in the period from the start of the next round to the start of the next round, the period from the end of the last round in the jackpot game state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. The promotion effect during the big hit that becomes the notification effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion promotion executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state is sometimes referred to as “end promotion promotion” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the game state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed effect symbol is usually a jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot to be notified. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the effect symbol variation display is performed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer arranged outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B, setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are possible. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (S17). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. An effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table by setting the state to the off state. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S15 shown in FIG. 9 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning process (S21). After executing the start winning process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S22 to S29 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  In the start winning process of S21, it is determined whether or not there has been a first start prize or a second start prize by the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B. The random number value MR1 for determination, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, the free entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A And in the case of the second start winning prize, it is stored at the top of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

  The special symbol normal process of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the change display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the special symbol confirmed in the special symbol game (the big hit symbol or One of the off-point symbols is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is selected from any of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a variation pattern determination random number MR3 based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variation display result is “big hit”. This includes the process of determining whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special diagram process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal process of S22 and the variation pattern setting process of S23, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the fixed symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which becomes the variation display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed using the special symbol display effect determination random number MR1, the jackpot type determination random value MR2, and the variation pattern determination random value MR3. The process which determines the fluctuation | variation display mode of is included.

  The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation processing includes processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. This includes the process of measuring. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S24 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted 1 or added, and the first Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic on the special symbol display 4A or a special game using the second special graphic on the second special symbol display 4B, Time measurements are taken. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of S24 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process of S25 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol resulting from the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set according to whether the big hit type is “non-probable big hit A”, “probable big hit A”, or “probable big hit B”. May be. As an example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of times the big winning opening is opened, which is the upper limit number of rounds, is ”Or“ probability big hit A ”, it is only necessary to set to“ 16 times ”so that the normal open big hit state is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “probable big hit B”, the number of times of opening the big winning opening that is the upper limit number of rounds to be executed is set to “5 times”, so that the short-term open big hit state is set. It's fine. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing of S27 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect LED 9 This includes a process of waiting until the elapse of time, and a process of performing various settings (setting of a probability change flag and a time reduction flag) for starting the probability change control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  In the big hit ending process, the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read, and the big hit type is any of “non-probable big hit A”, “probable big hit A”, and “probable big hit B”. Identify what happened. If it is determined that the identified big hit type is not “non-probable variation big hit”, setting for starting the probability variation control (setting of the probability variation flag) is performed.

  In addition, when the specified big hit type is “non-probable variable big hit”, the setting for starting the time reduction control (in advance corresponding to the setting of the time reduction flag and the upper limit value of the special game that can be executed during the time reduction control). A predetermined count initial value (“100” in the present embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter).

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S51). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag in accordance with the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the big hit symbol determination random number is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the hold storage display in the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U of the effect display device 5 according to the storage contents of the effect control buffer setting unit. The hold display update process for updating to the display is executed (S72).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S73 to S79 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received in the command analysis process. If the change pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (S74).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S74): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75).

  Production symbol variation processing (S75): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (S76): Based on the reception of the production control command (design determination command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped, control is performed to stop the variation of the production symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S77) or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Big hit display process (S77): After the end of the variation time, the effect display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S78).

  Big hit game processing (S78): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S79).

  Big hit end effect process (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S74) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set in S271 (S271). When the first variation start command reception flag is set (S271; Y), it is stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4” of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer. The various command data and various flags are shifted up by one buffer number (S272). Note that the contents of the buffer number “1” are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

  If the first variation start command reception flag is not set in S271 (S271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variation start command reception flag is set (S273). When the second variation start command reception flag is not set (S273; N), the effect symbol variation start process is terminated, and when the second variation start command reception flag is set (S273; Y), the start The various command data and the various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4” in the second special figure hold memory in the received command buffer at the time of winning are shifted up by one buffer number (S274). ). Note that the contents of the buffer number “1” are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

  After execution of S272 or S274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (S275).

  Next, the display result of the effect symbol (stop symbol) is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) (S276). In this case, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area To do.

  In the present embodiment, when the received variation display result designation command is the second variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, has the three symbols “7” as the stop symbol. The combination of effect symbols (big hit symbol) arranged in the above is determined. When the received variation display result designation command is the third variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, “333”, “555”, “999”, etc.). In the case where the received variation display result designation command is the fourth variation display result designation command corresponding to the uncertain variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120, for example, of the effect design in which 3 symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). In addition, when the received variation display result designation command is the first variation display result designation command corresponding to the deviation, a combination of production symbols (outage symbol) in which the three symbols are irregular as the stop symbols is determined.

  In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating combinations of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Thus, the stop symbol of the production symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is in a high base state (a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state) (S277). When the gaming state is in the high base state (S277; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display is a variation pattern of super reach (S278). When the variation pattern of the variation display is a super-reach variation pattern (S278; Y), a random effect determination random number is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the like, and the extracted reach effect determination random number, a reach effect (not shown) The reach effect is determined from the first reach effect to the third reach effect based on the determination table and the change display result in the change display (S279).

  As shown in FIG. 14D, in the first reach effect, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight in the effect display device 5 is executed, and the player during the operation reception period of the push button 31B in the battle effect. Is a reach effect in which the ally character wins or loses based on the operation of the push button 31B or the operation acceptance period has passed. If the teammate character wins in the battle effect, the fact that the change display result is a probable big hit will inform the player that the game state will be controlled to the probable state (highly accurate high base state) after the big hit game ends, When the teammate character is defeated at, it is notified that the game state is controlled to the high base state (low probability high base state) after the big hit game is ended by the variation display result being an uncertain change big hit. Furthermore, when the teammate character draws with the enemy character in the battle performance, the high display state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) continues due to the fluctuation display result being out of place (superreach out of reach). Inform.

  The second reach effect displays an image 210 of a push button 31B as an operation suggestion image to be described later on the effect display device 5, and changes the display mode of the image of the push button 31B based on the passage of time. The player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or notifies that the variable display result is a probable big hit based on the elapse of the operation reception period, This is a reach effect that informs that the result is out of place.

  The third reach effect is a reach effect in which an image 210 of a push button 31B as an operation suggestion image to be described later on the effect display device 5 is stopped or displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. In addition, when the image of the push button 31B is not stopped and displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, the change display result is informed, and the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the effect display device. When the display is stopped or appears in the center of the display area 5, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or the operation reception period has elapsed. Based on the above, it is notified that the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit.

  Note that the image 210 of the push button 31B displayed as the operation suggestion image in the display area of the effect display device 5 in the first reach effect to the third reach effect of the present embodiment is a translucent image. The image 210 of the push button 31 </ b> B displayed as the operation suggestion image in the display area of the effect display device 5 in the first reach effect to the third reach effect is not limited to the display area of the effect display device 5. If the display mode is distinguishable from the image 230 of the push button 31B to be displayed as an image, for example, an image having a different size or color from the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image, a partial image of the push button 31B, or the like It may be.

  In S279, when the display result of fluctuation is a probable big hit, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the execution of the first reach effect with the winning pattern at a rate of 33.3% as shown in FIG. , 33.3% is determined to execute the second reach effect with the success pattern, and 33.4% is determined to execute the third reach effect with the success pattern. That is, when the variable display result is a probable big hit, the execution of the first reach production with the winning pattern, the execution of the second reach production with the success pattern, and the execution of the third reach production with the success pattern are almost the same rate. To decide.

  In addition, when the variation display result is a non-probable big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first reach effect in the defeat pattern at a rate of 100% as shown in FIG. Execution of reach production and third reach production is not determined.

  Further, when the variation display result is out of order, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first reach effect in the draw pattern at a rate of 33.3% as shown in FIG. The execution of the second reach effect with the failure pattern is determined at a rate of 3%, and the execution of the third reach effect with the failure pattern is determined at a rate of 33.4%. That is, when the variation display result is out of place, the execution of the first reach effect in the draw pattern, the execution of the second reach effect in the failure pattern, and the execution of the third reach effect in the failure pattern are almost the same rate. decide.

  In the present embodiment, the execution of the first reach effect, the execution of the second reach effect, and the execution of the third reach effect are performed at substantially the same rate when the variation display result is a case where it is out of the probability variation big hit. Although the form to determine is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The execution of the 1st reach production, the execution of the 2nd reach production, and the execution of the 3rd reach production, the variation display result is the probability variation big hit It may be determined at a different rate depending on whether it is or not. By doing so, it is possible to create a reach effect that is easy to be executed when the variable display result is a probable big hit, so it is possible to make the player pay attention to which reach effect is executed. You can improve your interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, the reach effect determined to be executed when the fluctuation display result is a non-probable big hit is only the first reach effect of the defeat pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution of the second reach effect or the third reach effect may be determined even when the fluctuation display result is an uncertain change big hit. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the form in which the first reach effect to the third reach effect can be executed only when the gaming state is the high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first reach effect to the third reach effect may be executed even in the low base state.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the first reach effect has been determined in S279 (S280). When the execution of the second reach effect or the third reach effect is determined in S279 (S280; N), the process proceeds to S283, and when the execution of the first reach effect is determined in S279 (S280; Y). In addition to extracting the random number for determining the effect route for the first reach effect from the random number circuit 124, etc., based on the extracted effect route determining random number, the effect route determining table (not shown), and the variation display result in the variation display. The production route in the first reach production is determined as a chance route or a pinch route. The chance route is an effect route that suggests that the result of the battle is a victory (probability big hit) or a draw (out) by a teammate character attacking an enemy character in a battle effect. This is an effect route that suggests that the result of the attack is a defeat (non-probable big hit) or a draw (loss) when the enemy character attacks the teammate character in the battle effect.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit, that is, when the execution of the first reach production in the winning pattern is determined, the production route has a chance of 100%. Decide on the root. Further, when the fluctuation display result is a non-probable big hit, that is, when execution of the first reach production in the defeat pattern is decided, the production route is decided as a chance route at a rate of 100%. In addition, if the display result of the change is out of order, that is, if the execution of the first reach production in the draw pattern is decided, the production route is decided as a chance route at a rate of 50%, and at a rate of 50%. The production route is determined as a pinch route.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect route as the process table for executing the first reach effect, and proceeds to S290 (S282). The determination ratio of the effect route shown in FIG. 15 is an example, and the effect route may be determined at a different rate from the present embodiment.

  On the other hand, in S283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the second reach effect has been determined in S279. When the execution of the third reach effect is determined in S279 (S283; N), the process proceeds to S287, and when the execution of the second reach effect is determined in S279 (S283; Y), the operation promotion image is received from the random number circuit 124 or the like. Based on the extracted operation promotion image display mode determination random number, the operation promotion image display mode determination table (not shown), and the variation display result in the variation display, the display mode determination random number is extracted. The final display mode (the size of the image 230 of the push button 31B finally displayed as the operation promotion image) of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B is determined (S284).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit (probable big hit), the final display mode (size) of the image of the push button 31B is set to “large” at a rate of 80%. And “small” at a rate of 20%. If the fluctuation display result is out of place, the final display mode (size) of the image of the push button 31B is determined to be “large” at a rate of 20% and “large” at a rate of 80%. In addition, the determination ratio of the display mode of the operation promotion image in the present embodiment is an example, and the display mode of the operation promotion image may be determined at a determination ratio different from the present embodiment.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the display mode change count determination random number from the random number circuit 124 and the like, and determines the extracted display mode change count determination random number, the display mode change count determination table (not shown), and S284. Based on the final display mode of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operated promotion image, the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B that is the operation suggesting image during the second reach effect is 1 to 3 times. Either one is determined (S285). Note that the operation suggestion image in the present embodiment is an image that suggests that the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed, that is, the operation of the push button 31B is accepted.

  The second reach effect in the case where the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B that is the operation suggesting image is determined as one is the image 210 of the white push button 31B displayed as the operation suggesting image, The operation promotion image (the image 230 of the push button 31B having the size “large” or “small”) is changed. Further, the second reach effect when the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B that is the operation suggesting image is determined to be two is the image 210 of the white push button 31B displayed as the operation suggesting image, After the image is changed to the image 210 of the blue push button 31B, the operation promotion image (the image 230 of the push button 31B having the size “large” or “small”) is changed. Further, the second reach effect when the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B that is the operation suggesting image is determined to be three times is the image 210 of the white push button 31B displayed as the operation suggesting image, After changing to the image 210 of the blue push button 31B, the operation is further changed to the image 210 of the red push button 31B, and the operation promotion image (the image 230 of the push button 31B having the size “large” or “small”). To change.

  Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 16B, when the final display mode of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is “large”, the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image. The display mode change frequency is determined once at a rate of 10%, twice at a rate of 20%, and 3 times at a rate of 70%. When the final display mode of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is “small”, the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is set to 1 at a rate of 70%. 2 times at a rate of 20%, and 3 times at a rate of 10%. It should be noted that the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in this embodiment is an example, and the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image is different from the present embodiment. The number of changes may be determined.

  In this embodiment, when the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B is determined as three as the operation suggestion image, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is set to “large”. Both the case of being displayed and the case of being displayed as “small”, but when the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B is determined as three times as the operation suggestion image, The image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image may be always displayed as “large”. Further, in this embodiment, when the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B is determined as one as the operation suggestion image, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is “large”. Both the case of being displayed and the case of being displayed as “small”, but when the number of changes in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B is determined as one as the operation suggestion image, The image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image may be displayed as “small” without fail.

  Then, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the final display mode of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image and the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image as a process table for executing the second reach effect. A process table corresponding to the display mode change count is selected, and the process proceeds to S290.

  That is, in the second reach effect in the present embodiment, the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B displayed as the operation suggestion image changes in the order of white → blue → red, and has different sizes (large or large) as the operation promotion image. This is an effect in which the image 230 of the (small) push button 31B is displayed. In the second reach production in the present embodiment, when an image of the large push button 31B (an image 230 of the “large” push button 31B as the operation promotion image) is displayed as the operation promotion image, the operation promotion image is small. The fluctuation display result is a big hit (probability change big hit) at a higher rate than the case where the image of the push button 31B (the image 230 of the “small” push button 31B as the operation promotion image) is displayed, and is displayed as an operation suggestion image. The ratio at which the image 230 of the “large” push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image differs depending on the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B.

  Specifically, when the image 210 of the red push button 31B is displayed as the operation suggestion image, the ratio that the image 230 of the “large” push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image is the highest. When the image 210 of the white push button 31B is displayed, the ratio of displaying the image 230 of the “large” push button 31B as the operation promotion image is the lowest. For this reason, in the second reach production, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the color change (display mode change count) of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16B, in this embodiment, when the number of operation suggestion image display mode changes is determined to be three (that is, the image 210 of the red push button 31B is displayed as the operation suggestion image). Even when the image 230 of the red push button 31B is displayed as the operation suggestion image, the “small” push button 31B image 230 may be displayed as the operation promotion image. The player can pay attention to which of the image 230 of the “small” push button 31B and the image 230 of the “large” push button 31B is displayed as the work promotion image.

  In S287, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect to be any one of patterns 1 to 6.

  As shown in FIG. 17C and FIG. 26A, the pattern 1 is the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion image from the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 5 in the center of the display area. Is moved over a period L (see FIG. 26A, for example, 1.5 seconds), and the images of these two push buttons 31B are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 in the period L1 (FIG. 26 (A), for example, 0.7 seconds) are overlapped (superimposed) and stopped, and two push buttons 31B as operation suggestion images at the stopped position (the center of the display area of the effect display device 5) It is a pattern which displays the image 230 of the push button 31B as an operation promotion image instead of the image 210 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, in this embodiment, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are moved from the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center of the display area. The period L to be performed is a period longer than the period L1 (L> L1) in which the images of the two push buttons 31B are overlapped and stopped at the center of the display area of the effect display device 5.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 17C and 26B, the pattern 2 is an image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image from the upper side of the display area of the effect display device 5 to the center of the display area. , The image of the push button 31B is stopped at the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, and the push button 31B as an operation suggestion image at the stopped position (the center of the display area of the effect display device 5). It is a pattern which displays the image 230 of the push button 31B as an operation promotion image instead of the image 210 of FIG.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 17C and 26C, the pattern 3 displays the image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggesting image gradually (appearance display) in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. ), And based on the completion of the progressive display of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image, the operation is promoted in place of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the center of the display area. This is a pattern for displaying an image 230 of the push button 31B as an image. That is, patterns 1 to 3 are patterns for notifying that the variation display result is a big hit (probable big hit).

  In pattern 1 to pattern 3, after the image 230 of the push button 31 </ b> B as the operation promotion image is displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, the player receives the operation during the operation reception period of the push button 31 </ b> B. It is notified that the change display result is a big hit based on the operation of the push button 31B or when the operation reception period has elapsed.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 17C and 27A, the pattern 4 displays the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images from the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 5. The image of these two push buttons 31B is moved to the center of the display area 5 at a constant speed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 and is shorter than the period L (FIG. 27A). Refer to: L> L1) and then stop in an overlapping manner, then discrete (move toward the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5, for example, the movement period is 0.5 seconds), and these two push buttons This is a pattern in which the 31B image is stopped and displayed over a period L2 (L2> L1, for example, L2 is 1.0 second) longer than the period L1 at the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 as failure emphasis display. .

  The pattern 4 is a form in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are moved from the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center of the display area at a constant speed over a period L. However, the period during which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are moved toward the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 may be varied. As described above, when the period for moving the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images toward the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 is different, the image of the push button 31B as one operation suggestion image. The period during which 210 is moved toward the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 may be shorter than the period L1 in which the images of the two push buttons 31B are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5.

  In the present embodiment, the “period corresponding to failure emphasis display” in the present invention is a period in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are displayed on the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5. L2 is set, but the “period corresponding to the failure emphasis display” includes a period during which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are displayed on the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5. It may be a period including other indications.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “period corresponding to the superimposed display” in the present invention is the period L1 in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are overlapped and displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. However, if “the period corresponding to the superimposed display” includes a period in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, other display is performed. It may be a period including

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 17C and 27B, the pattern 5 includes an image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggesting image from the upper side of the display area of the effect display device 5 in the center of the display area. The image of the push button 31B is stopped for a predetermined period in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 and then the image of the push button 31B is displayed as a failure emphasis display. In this pattern, the display is stopped at the lower end of the display area over a period L3 (L3: 1.5 seconds> L2: 1.0 seconds> L1: 0.7 seconds) longer than the period L2.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 17C and 27C, the pattern 6 is obtained by setting the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image for a predetermined period in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. After the gradual display (appearance display), the period L4 (L3: 1.5 seconds> L2: 1.0 seconds> L1: 0.7 seconds> L4: 0.3 seconds) shorter than the period L1 This is a pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is disappeared (erased) from the center of the display area without completing the progressive display (appearance display) as failure emphasis display. That is, patterns 4 to 6 are patterns for notifying that the fluctuation display result is out of place. That is, in this embodiment, when the display pattern of the image of the push button 31B in the third reach effect is the patterns 4 to 6, the periods for performing the failure emphasis display are different from each other.

  In S287, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit, the display pattern of the push button 31B in the third reach effect is determined to be pattern 1 at a rate of 10%. The pattern 2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern 3 is determined at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the fluctuation display result is out of place, the display pattern of the image of the push button 31B in the third reach effect is determined to be pattern 1 at a ratio of 70%, and 20 The pattern 5 is determined at a ratio of%, and the pattern 6 is determined at a ratio of 10%.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images in the third reach effect are moved from the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center of the display area. The ratio that the variation display result is the biggest hit when the effect of stopping the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B overlappingly in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 is executed (pattern 1 or pattern 4). The effect (pattern 3 or pattern 6) in which the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is gradually displayed (appearance display) in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 has the largest variation display result. The ratio becomes higher. That is, in the present embodiment, an example in which the big hit expectation is different according to the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the expectation degree of jackpot of each display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in these third reach effects may be all or part of the same. Further, the order of the ratios in which the variable display result is a big hit in each of these display patterns may be different from that of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the period L4 is illustrated as a period shorter than the period L1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period L4 is a period L1 as long as the period L4 is shorter than the period L2. It may be a longer period.

  And after execution of S287, CPU120 for effect control selects the process table according to the display pattern of the image of push button 31B as a process table for performing a 3rd reach effect, and progresses to S289 (S288).

  When the gaming state is in the low base state (normal state) (S277; N) or when the variation pattern of the variation display is a normal reach or non-reach variation pattern (S278; N), a variation pattern designation command The process table corresponding to is selected and the process proceeds to S290 (S289).

  In S290, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in any of S282, S288, and S289 (S290).

  In the process table, display control execution data for controlling display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are sequentially arranged in time series in association with each process data n (No. 1 to N). Yes.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 produces the production device (production display as production component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various LEDs as effect parts, speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (S291). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. In addition, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to perform various LED on / off control. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern designation command is set in the variation time timer (S292). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right effect symbols in the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 is written in the VRAM. The signal corresponding to the image data is output to the effect display device 5, and the effect display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variation of the effect symbol. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75) (S294).

  FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 21, FIG. 23, and FIG. 24 are flowcharts illustrating the effect symbol variation process (S75) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by 1 (S301, S302, S303).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S306). If the process timer has expired, the process data is switched (S307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (S308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, and the like set next (S309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the rendering device (for rendering) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) The control of the component is executed (S309b).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach effect of any one of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the third reach effect is being executed (S310, S311, and S312).

  If it is not during the execution period of any reach effect (S310; N, S311; N, S312; N), it is confirmed whether or not the variation control timer has timed out (S313). When the variation control timer has timed out (S313; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of effect symbols in the middle left and right (displayed 30 ms after the last effect symbol display switching time). Image data of the power screen is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (S314). In this manner, the effect display device 5 can implement the effect control of the effect symbols. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 5. Output. As such, the effect display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the effect symbol variation. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (S315).

  If the variation control timer has not timed out (S313; N), after execution of S315, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation time timer has timed out (S316). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76) (S318). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S317; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the effect symbol variation stop processing ( The value is updated according to S76) (S318). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control for stopping variation.For example, a variation pattern designation command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is used. Even in the case of reception, the variation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol is finished).

  In the process table used for the variation control of the effect symbol, process data during the effect symbol variation display is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the production symbol variation time. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n is timed out in the process of S306, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the effect symbol based on the process table is completed. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is during the execution period of the first reach effect (S310; Y), it is determined whether or not a post-operation effect execution flag indicating that the post-operation effect described later is being executed is set ( S321). When the post-operation effect execution flag is set (S321; Y), the process proceeds to S333, and when the post-operation effect execution flag is not set (S321; N), the push button 31B is operating. It is determined whether or not there is (S322). If it is during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S322; Y), the process proceeds to S330, and if it is not during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S322; N), the images of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggestion images 210 is moved and displayed from the left and right end sides of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center of the display area (S323).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect route of the first reach effect is a chance route (S324). When the production route of the first reach production is a chance route (S324; Y), the message images 220 of “win” and “draw” indicating the production result of the first reach production are displayed on the push buttons 31B. As a result-suggesting image corresponding to this image, the display is moved from the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center of the display area (S325). Further, when the production route of the first reach production is a pinch route (S324; N), message images 220 of “defeat!” And “draw!” Suggesting the production result of the first reach production are displayed. As a result suggestion image corresponding to the image of each push button 31B, the display is moved and displayed from the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center of the display area (S326).

  After execution of S325 or S326, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (S327). When it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (S327; N), the processing of S313 to S318 is executed, and when it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (S327; Y), the display of the effect display device 5 is performed. The display of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is started at the center of the area (S328), and the result suggestion image ("win!" And "draw!" Message image 220, "defeat!" And “Draw!” Message image 220) are terminated (S329), and the process proceeds to S330.

  In S330, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push button 31B has been operated. When the push button 31B is operated (S330; Y), the first post-operation effect for notifying the battle effect result in the first reach effect is being executed based on the operation of the push button 31B. If the push button 31B is operated (S330; N), whether or not it is the end timing of the operation reception period of the push button 31B is set. Is determined (S331). When it is the end timing of the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S331; Y), the post-operation effect executing flag is set and the process proceeds to S333 (S332). If it is not the end timing of the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S331; Y), the processing of S313 to S318 is executed, and the effect symbol variation processing is ended.

  Then, in S333, the effect control CPU 120 executes a first post-operation effect execution process for executing the first post-operation effect, executes the processes of S313 to S318, and ends the effect symbol changing process.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a first post-effects effect execution process (S333) in the effect symbol changing process. In the first post-effect production execution process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first post-operation production process timer, which will be described later, is operating (S401). If the post-first operation effect process timer is not in operation (S401; N), it is further determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit (probable big hit A or probable big hit B) (S402). When the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit (S402; Y), the first post-operation effect process table for the probable big hit is selected and the process proceeds to S407 (S403). If the fluctuation display result is not a probable variation big hit (S402; N), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is a non-probable big hit (S404). When the fluctuation display result is a non-probable big hit (S404; Y), the first post-operation stage effect process table for the non-probable big hit is selected and the process proceeds to S407 (S405), and the fluctuation display result is out of place (S404). N) selects the first post-operation effect process table for losing, and proceeds to S407 (S406).

  Then, in S407, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the first post-operation effect process table selected in any of S403, S405, and S406.

  In the post-first operation effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data for controlling the operation, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are associated with each process data n (from No. 1 to N) in time series. Are arranged in order.

  Thereafter, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the effect device (the effect display as an effect part) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of device 5, various LEDs as effect parts, speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed, and the first post-operation effect execution process is terminated. (S408). For example, in order to display an image according to the first reach effect on the effect display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. In addition, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to perform various LED on / off control. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  On the other hand, when the first post-operation effect process timer is operating in S401 (S401; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the first post-operation effect process timer by 1 (S409). It is determined whether the post-production process timer has timed out (S410). If the post-first operation effect process timer has timed out (S410; Y), it is further determined whether or not it is the last post-first operation effect process timer that has timed out (S411).

  When it is not the last post-first-operation effect process timer that has timed out (S411; N), the post-first-operation effect process data is switched (S412). That is, the first post-operation effect process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the first post-operation effect process table in the first post-operation effect process timer (S413). In addition, after the first operation, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, and the like set next. The effect execution process ends (S414).

  In addition, when it is the last post-first-effect production process timer that has timed out in S411 (S411; Y), the post-operation-execution execution flag is cleared, and the first post-operation effect execution process ends ( S415).

  If the post-first operation effect process timer has not timed out in S410, the contents of process data corresponding to the first post-effect effect process timer (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, The control of the effect device (effect parts) is executed according to the operation unit control data, etc., and the first operation post-effect effect execution process is terminated (S416).

  Returning to the effect symbol variation process, if it is determined that the second reach effect is being executed (S311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the post-operation effect execution flag is set. (S421). When the post-operation effect execution flag is set (S421; Y), the process proceeds to S434. When the post-operation effect execution flag is not set (S421; N), the operation reception period of the push button 31B is further increased. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S422). If it is during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S422; Y), the process proceeds to S431. If it is not during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S422; N), the first-stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is the display start timing of the image (image 210 of the white push button 31B) (S423).

  When it is the display start timing of the image 210 of the first stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image (S423; Y), the first stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. Display of the image 210 is started (S424). And the process of S313-S318 is performed and an effect design change process is complete | finished.

  If it is not the display start timing of the image 210 of the first-stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image (S423; N), the second-stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. It is determined whether or not it is the display start timing of the image (image 210 of the blue push button 31B) (S425). When it is the display start timing of the image 210 of the second stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image (S425; Y), the second stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the display area of the effect display device 5 is displayed. The display of the image 210 is started (S426). And the process of S313-S318 is performed and an effect design change process is complete | finished.

  If it is not the display start timing of the image 210 of the second stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image (S425; N), the third stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. It is determined whether it is the display start timing of the image (image 210 of the red push button 31B) (S427). If it is the display start timing of the image 210 of the third-stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image (S427; Y), the third-stage push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the display area of the effect display device 5 The display of the image 210 is started (S428). And the process of S313-S318 is performed and an effect design change process is complete | finished.

  If it is not the display start timing of the image 210 of the push button 31B at the third stage as the operation suggestion image (S427; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B. Determination is made (S429). If it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (S429; N), the processing of S313 to S318 is executed to end the effect symbol changing process, and the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B is reached (S429; Y) ) Is a display mode (large or small) determined in S284 of the production symbol variation start process for displaying the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image instead of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image. The process proceeds to S431.

  In S431, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push button 31B has been operated. When the push button 31B is operated (S431; Y), the process proceeds to S433, and when the push button 31B is not operated (S431; N), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the operation reception period of the push button 31B. Determination is made (S432). When it is not the end timing of the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S432; N), the processing of S313 to S318 is executed to end the effect symbol variation process, and it is the end timing of the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S432; Y) proceeds to S433. In S433, the effect control CPU 120 sets a post-operation effect executing flag and proceeds to S434.

  Next, in S434, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second post-operation effect item process, executes the processes of S313 to S318, and ends the effect symbol changing process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a second post-effects effect execution process (S434) in the effect symbol changing process. In the post-second operation effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a second post-operation effect process timer, which will be described later, is in operation (S441). If the post-second operation effect process timer is not in operation (S441; N), it is further determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit (probable big hit A or probable big hit B) (S442). When the variation display result is a probable big hit (S442; Y), the second post-effect production process table for the probable big hit is selected and the process proceeds to S445 (S443). If the fluctuation display result is out of order (S442; N), the second post-operation stage effect process table for selection is selected, and the process proceeds to S445 (S444).

  In S445, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the second post-operation effect process table selected in S443 or S444.

  In the second post-operation effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data for controlling the operation, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are associated with each process data n (from No. 1 to N) in time series. Are arranged in order.

  Thereafter, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the effect device (the effect display as an effect part) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various LEDs as effect parts, speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed, and the post-second operation effect execution process is terminated. (S446). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the second reach effect on the effect display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. In addition, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to perform various LED on / off control. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  On the other hand, if the post-second operation effect process timer is operating in S441 (S441; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the second post-operation effect process timer by 1 (S447), and the second operation. It is determined whether the post-production process timer has timed out (S448). When the post-second operation effect process timer has timed out (S448; Y), it is further determined whether or not the timer operation timed out is the last post-second operation effect process timer (S449).

  If it is not the last post-second operation effect process timer that is timed out (S449; N), the post-second operation effect process data is switched (S450). That is, the second post-operation effect process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer set value in the second post-effect effect process table in the second post-effect effect process timer (S451). In addition, after the second operation, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, and the like set next. The effect execution process ends (S452).

  In addition, when it is the last second post-operation effect process timer that has timed out in S449 (S449; Y), the post-operation effect execution flag is cleared, and the second post-operation effect execution process ends ( S454).

  If the post-second operation effect process timer has not timed out in S448 (S448; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the second post-effect effect process timer (display control execution data, LED control execution data, The control of the effect device (effect parts) is executed according to the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., and the second post-operation effect execution process is terminated (S453).

  Returning to the effect symbol variation process, if it is determined that the third reach effect is being executed (S312; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the post-operation effect execution period flag is set. Determination is made (S461). When the post-operation effect execution period flag is set (S461; Y), the process proceeds to S480, and when the post-operation effect execution period flag is not set (S461; N), the operation reception period of the push button 31B. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S462). If it is during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S462; Y), the process proceeds to S476, and if it is not during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (S462; N), it is further determined whether or not it is during the failure emphasis display period. Is determined (S463).

  If it is during the failure emphasis display period (S463; Y), the process proceeds to S482, and if it is not during the failure emphasis display period (S463; N), the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect. It is determined whether the display pattern is pattern 1 or pattern 4 (S464). In the case of pattern 1 or pattern 4 (S464; Y), during the period of moving the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images toward the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 (two push buttons It is determined whether or not it is during the moving display period of the 31B image (S465).

  When the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B are moving (S465; Y), the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting progress images are displayed on the left and right end sides in the display area of the effect display device 5. Display from the center to the center, and proceed to S473 (S466). If the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B is not moving (S465; N), the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting image is stopped at the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. The two push buttons 31B are displayed in an overlapping state (overlapping display) (S467). Then, the process proceeds to S473.

  In S464, when the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect is not the pattern 1 and the pattern 4 (S464; N), the push button as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect. It is determined whether or not the display pattern of the 31B image 210 is pattern 2 or pattern 5 (S468). When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B is the pattern 2 or the pattern 5 (S468; Y), the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is further directed toward the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. It is determined whether or not it is during the movement period (during the movement display period of the image of the push button 31B) (S469).

  When the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is in the moving period (S469; Y), the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is viewed from the upper end portion side in the display area of the effect display device 5. The display is moved toward the center, and the process proceeds to S473 (S470). If the image 210 of the push button 31B is not in the moving period (S469; N), the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 (S471). ), Go to S473.

  If the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image is the pattern 3 or the pattern 6 in S468 (S468; N), the effect display device 5 displays the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image. Are gradually displayed (appearance display) at the center of the display area (S472), and the process proceeds to S473.

  Next, in S473, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect is any one of the patterns 1 to 3, that is, the variation display result. It is determined whether or not it is a probable big hit. When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect is any one of the patterns 4 to 6 (S473; N), the process proceeds to S481, and as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect. When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B is any one of the patterns 1 to 3 (S473; N), it is determined whether it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (S474). If it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (S474; N), the processing of S313 to S318 is executed to finish the effect symbol changing process, and it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (S474; Y) ) Starts displaying the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, and proceeds to S476.

  In S476, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push button 31B has been operated. When the push button 31B is operated (S476; Y), the process proceeds to S478, and when the push button 31B is not operated (S476; N), it is further determined whether or not it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B. (S477). When it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (S477; Y), the process proceeds to S478, and when it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B, the processing of S313 to S318 is executed, and the effect symbol changing process is ended. .

  Then, in S478, the effect control CPU 120 sets a post-operation effect executing flag and executes a third post-operation effect execution process (S480). And the process of S313-S318 is performed and an effect design change process is complete | finished.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a third post-operation effect executing process (S480) in the effect symbol changing process. In the post-third operation effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a third post-operation effect process timer, which will be described later, is operating (S501). When the post-third operation effect process timer is not in operation (S501; N), the third post-operation effect process table corresponding to the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image is selected (S502), A process timer in the process data 1 of the selected third post-operation effect process table is started (S503).

  In the post-third operation effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data for controlling the operation, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are associated with each process data n (from No. 1 to N) in time series. Are arranged in order.

  Thereafter, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the effect device (the effect display as an effect part) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of device 5, various LEDs as effect parts, speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed, and the post-third operation effect execution process is terminated. (S504). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the third reach effect on the effect display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. In addition, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to perform various LED on / off control. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  On the other hand, when the second post-operation effect process timer is operating in S501 (S501; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the second post-operation effect process timer by 1 (S505). Then, it is determined whether or not the post-third operation effect process timer has expired (S506). If the post-third operation effect process timer has timed out (S506; Y), it is further determined whether or not it is the last post-third operation effect process timer that has timed out (S507).

  When it is not the last post-third operation effect process timer that has timed out (S507; N), the post-third operation effect process data is switched (S508). That is, the third post-operation effect process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the third post-operation effect process table in the third operation effect process timer (S509). In addition, after the third operation, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next. The effect execution process ends (S510).

  In addition, when the time-out in S507 is the last post-third operation effect process timer (S507; Y), the post-operation effect execution flag is cleared, and the third post-operation effect execution process ends ( S512).

  If the post-third operation effect process timer has not timed out in S506 (S506; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the third post-effect effect process timer (display control execution data, LED control execution data, According to the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., the control of the effect device (effect parts) is executed, and the post-third operation effect execution process is terminated (S511).

  Returning to the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 determines in S481 whether or not it is during the failure emphasis display period. If it is not during the failure emphasis display period (S481; N), the processing of S313 to S318 is executed to end the effect symbol changing process, and if it is during the failure emphasis display period (S481; Y), the process proceeds to S482. move on. In S482, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect is the pattern 4. When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect is the pattern 4 (S482; Y), the image of the two push buttons 31B is displayed on the effect display device 5 as the failure emphasis display. Stop display is performed on the left and right ends of the area (S483). And the process of S313-S318 is performed and an effect design change process is complete | finished.

  When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect is not the pattern 4 (S482; N), the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display pattern is pattern 5 (S484). When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect is the pattern 5 (S484; Y), the image 210 of the push button 31B is displayed as the failure emphasis display in the display area of the effect display device 5. Is stopped and displayed at the lower end (S485). And the process of S313-S318 is performed and an effect design change process is complete | finished.

  When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect is the pattern 6 (S484; N), the image 210 of the push button 31B is displayed as the failure emphasis display on the effect display device 5. It disappears from the center (display is terminated) (S486). And the process of S313-S318 is performed and an effect design change process is complete | finished.

  Next, the display mode of the effect display device 5 when executing the first reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. First, as shown in FIG. 28 (A) and FIG. 28 (B), when the effect symbols stop in the combination of reach in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R of “left” and “right”, the effect display device 5 The character and the enemy character are displayed, and the first reach production is started. Next, as shown in FIGS. 28C and 28D, when the execution of the chance route is determined in the first reach production, the teammate character attacks the enemy character.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 28E, images 210 of two push buttons 31 </ b> B as operation suggesting images are displayed on the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5. At this time, above the image 210 of the push button 31B displayed at the left end of the display area of the effect display device 5, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as a result suggesting image corresponding to the effect contents of the effect after the first operation. A message image 220 of “Victory!” Corresponding to the image of the push button 31B is displayed above the image 210 of the push button 31B displayed at the right end of the display area of the effect display device 5. A message image 220 of “Draw!” Is displayed. That is, the number of images 210 of the push button 31B displayed as the operation suggestion image and the number of message images 220 displayed as the result suggestion image in the first reach production of the present embodiment are the same.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 28F and 29G, the images of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images and the message images 220 as the result suggestion images corresponding to the images of the push buttons 31B. Are moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, and the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are displayed in the center of the display area. When the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are displayed in the center of the display area, the display of each message image 220 is ended. In addition, after the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are overlapped and displayed over the period L1 in the center of the display area, these operation suggesting images are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. In place of the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B, display of the image 230 of the push button 31B as an operation promotion image is started, and reception of the operation of the push button 31B is started.

  When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends, as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) and 29 (I). In addition, it is informed that the teammate character wins the enemy character as the first post-effect and the variation display result is a probable big hit, or the teammate character and the enemy character draw as the first operation presentation and the variation display result is displayed. It is notified that it is out of place.

  28 and 29, the case where the first reach effect is executed on the chance route has been described. However, when the first reach effect is executed on the pinch route, the first reach effect is started. The enemy character attacks the ally character. Then, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31 </ b> B as operation suggesting images are displayed on the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5. At this time, above the image 210 of the push button 31B displayed at the left end portion of the display area of the effect display device 5, a message image 220 of “defeat!” As a result suggesting image corresponding to the image of the push button 31B. Is displayed above the image 210 of the push button 31B displayed at the right end of the display area of the effect display device 5, and a message “Draw!” As a result suggesting image corresponding to the image of the push button 31B. An image 220 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as in the case shown in FIGS. 28 (F) and 29 (G), the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images and the messages as the result suggesting images corresponding to the images 210 of the push buttons 31B. The image 220 is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. Then, after the two push buttons 31B images 210 as the operation suggestion images are displayed over the period L1 in the center of the display area, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed. Instead, the display of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is started, and the reception of the operation of the push button 31B by the player is started.

  When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends, the enemy character wins the teammate character as the post-first operation effect. It is notified that the fluctuation display result is an uncertain change big hit, or the fact that the friend display character and the enemy character are drawn and the fluctuation display result is out of place as an effect after the first operation.

  In the present embodiment, a battle effect is executed during the first reach effect, and the variation display result is reported as either a probable big hit, a non-probable big hit, or a deviation as a result of the battle effect (post-first operation effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the effect executed during the first reach effect is an effect other than the battle effect, as long as it suggests a plurality of effect results. Good. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (G), a mode in which only one image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of images 230 of the push button 31 </ b> B as operation promotion images may be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. In addition, when a plurality of images 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 in this way, the result is advantageous to the player based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player. A corresponding effect (an effect that the ally character wins the enemy character if it is a chance route, or an effect that the ally character and the enemy character draw if it is a pinch route) may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the form in which the battle effect can be executed by the chance route and the pinch route is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the battle effect is the chance route and the pinch route. You may perform by either one. In the case where the battle effect is executed with only one of the chance route and the pinch route in this way, for example, the image 210 of the three push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion image and “Victory!” As the result suggestion image, The message image 220 for each of “Defeat!” And “Draw!” Is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 and then the image of the push button 31B is displayed as an operation promotion image. Then, based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character as a post-first operation effect (probability change jackpot notification), the effect that the ally character loses to the enemy character (non-probability change jackpot notification), Any one of the effects (disappearance notification) that the ally character and the enemy character draw may be executed.

  Next, the display mode of the effect display device 5 when executing the second reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. First, as shown in FIGS. 30 (A) and 30 (B), when the effect symbols are stopped in a combination of reach in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R of “left” and “right”, the display of the effect display device 5 is performed. The image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggesting image is displayed in the center of the area, and the second reach effect is started. At the start of the second reach production, as shown in FIG. 30B, the push button 31B is not in the operation acceptance period such as “waiting for button operation” together with the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image. A message image 220 indicating that is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 30B to FIG. 30D, the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image changes in order of white → blue → red over time. Next, as shown in FIGS. 31 (E) and 31 (F), a push button 31B of any one of white, blue, and red as an operation suggesting image is provided at the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. Instead of the image 210, the image of the push button 31B as the operation promoting image of the same size as the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image (the image 230 of the push button 31B having a size of “small”), or An image of the push button 31B (an image 230 of the push button 31B having a large size) as an operation promotion image having a size larger than the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is displayed, and the push button 31B. The acceptance of the operation is started.

  When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends, as shown in FIGS. 31 (G) and 31 (H). In addition, it is notified that the variation display result is a probable big hit or the variation display result is out of place as the second post-operation effect.

  Next, the display mode of the effect display device 5 when executing the third reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 32 (A) and FIG. 32 (B), the third reach effect starts when the effect symbols stop in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R in a combination of reach. Is done.

  And when the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect is the pattern 1 or the pattern 4, as shown in FIGS. 32 (B) to 32 (D), the effect display An image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggesting image is moved and displayed from the left end side and the left end side of the display area of the device 5 toward the center of the display area. As described above, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are overlapped and displayed over the period L1 in the center of the display area (see FIGS. 26A and 27A). .

  Next, when the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect is the pattern 1, as shown in FIG. 33 (E), when the period L1 elapses, the effect display device 5 In the center of the display area, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed instead of the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting image, and acceptance of the operation of the push button 31B is started. When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends, as shown in FIG. 33 (F), after the third operation As an effect, it is notified that the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit.

  When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect is the pattern 4, as shown in FIGS. 33 (G) and 33 (H), when the period L1 elapses, the effect The images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images that are displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 5 are moved and displayed toward the right end side and the left end side of the display area, respectively. The images of these two push buttons 31B are stopped and displayed at the right and left ends of the display area as failure emphasis display, and then deleted. That is, when the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach production is the pattern 4, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the failure emphasis display are pushed as the operation promotion image. The button 31B is displayed in a different area from the image 230.

  As shown in FIG. 32D, when the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting image is displayed at the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, these images are displayed in duplicate. The display area when the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 is one image of the push button 31B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (H), when images 210 of two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 as failure emphasis display, one push button 31B Is displayed at the right end of the display area, and the image of the other push button 31B is displayed at the left end of the display area. Therefore, the images of the two push buttons 31B as the failure emphasis display are effect display devices. The display area when displayed in the display area 5 is two images of these push buttons 31B. That is, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4, the image of the two push buttons 31B as the failure emphasis display is more in the effect display device 5 than the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion image. The display area is large.

  Further, when the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach production is the pattern 2 or the pattern 5, as shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (D), “left ”,“ Right ”effect symbol display areas 5 </ b> L and 5 </ b> R, when the effect symbols are stopped by the reach combination, the image 210 of the push button 31 </ b> B as the operation suggestion image is displayed from the upper end side of the display area of the effect display device 5 The display is moved toward the center of the area. The image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is stopped and displayed over the period L2 in the center of the display area.

  Next, when the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect is the pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 34 (E), when the predetermined period elapses, the effect display device 5 In the center of the display area, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed instead of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image, and acceptance of the operation of the push button 31B is started. When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends, the variation display result is a probable big hit as an effect after the third operation. Is notified.

  When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect is the pattern 5, as shown in FIG. 34 (F), when the predetermined period has elapsed, the display area of the effect display device 5 The image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image stopped and displayed at the center of the image is moved and displayed toward the lower end of the display area. Then, the image 210 of the push button 31B is stopped and displayed at the lower end portion of the display area as failure emphasis display, and then erased.

  Further, when the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach production is the pattern 3 or the pattern 6, as shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to 35 (C), “left ”,“ Right ”effect symbol display areas 5 </ b> L and 5 </ b> R, when the effect symbols are stopped by a combination of reach, the image 210 of the push button 31 </ b> B as the operation suggestion image is displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. The appearance display of the image of the push button 31B is started.

  Next, when the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image in the third reach effect is the pattern 3, as shown in FIG. 35D, as the operation suggestion image based on the elapse of a predetermined period. When the appearance display of the image 210 of the push button 31B is completed, the push button 31B as the operation promoting image is replaced with the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. The image 230 is displayed and the acceptance of the operation of the push button 31B is started. When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends, the variation display result is a probable big hit as an effect after the third operation. Is notified.

  When the display pattern of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the third reach effect is the pattern 6, as shown in FIG. The image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image that has been displayed until then is deleted as the failure emphasis display.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, when the first reach effect is executed, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is the effect display device. Before the image is displayed in the center of the display area 5, as the operation suggestion image and the result suggestion image, the image 210 and 220 of the push button 31 B, the message image 220 of “Victory!”, The image of the push button 31 B and the image “ The message image 220 of “Min!” Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5, so that the effect result of the effect after the first operation is shown in advance in “Victory” shown in FIG. 29 (H) and FIG. 29 (I). Therefore, the result suggestion image type displayed together with the image 210 of the push button 31B displayed as the operation suggestion image ("winning" ! "Or" draw! ", Since it is possible to focus the player's message image 220) of the (not shown) such as" defeated! ", It is possible to improve the game interest. In the first reach production of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28 (E), two push buttons 31B images 210 as operation suggesting images and two message images 220 as result suggesting images are displayed. Any effect may be displayed as long as it is displayed in different areas of the effect display device 5.

  In the present embodiment, the form of displaying the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image and the message image 220 as the result suggesting image on the effect display device 5 as separate images is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image and the message image as the result suggesting image may be displayed on the effect display device 5 as an integrated image. Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28E and 28F, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the image 210 of the push button 31B as the work suggestion image and the message as the result suggestion image Although an example in which the image 220 is displayed in close proximity is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image 210 of the push button 31B as the creation suggestion image and the message image 220 as the result suggestion image The display area of the effect display device 5 may be displayed in a completely different area.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, when the first reach effect is executed, the number of the images 210 of the push button 31B displayed on the effect display device 5 as the operation suggesting image and the effect display as the result suggesting image. The number of message images 220 displayed on the device 5 is the same (in this embodiment, the number of images 210 of the push button 31B displayed on the effect display device 5 as an operation suggesting image and the result indicating image displayed on the effect display device 5). The number of message images 220 to be displayed is two), so that the number of images 210 of the push button 31B displayed on the effect display device 5 as the operation suggestion image and the result suggestion image are displayed on the effect display device 5. The push button 31B displayed on the effect display device 5 as these operation suggestion images is different from the case where the number of message images 220 is different. Since the message image 220 displayed on the effect display device 5 and the image 210 as a result suggestion image player can easily identify and improve the game playability.

  In particular, in this embodiment, an image 210 of one push button 31B as an operation suggestion image and a message image 220 as a result suggestion image corresponding to the image 210 of the one push button 31B are displayed in proximity to each other, and the operation suggestion image Since the image 210 of the other push button 31B and the message image 220 as the result suggesting image corresponding to the image 210 of the other push button 31B are displayed in proximity to each other, they are displayed on the effect display device 5 as the operation suggesting images. The player can more easily identify the image 210 of the push button 31B to be displayed and the message image 220 displayed on the effect display device 5 as the result suggesting image.

  In this embodiment, the number of operation suggestion images and the result suggestion images are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of operation suggestion images and the result suggestion are not limited thereto. Two or more different numbers may be displayed as the number of images. For example, the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image may be displayed more than the message image 220 as the result suggestion image, or the message image 220 as the result suggestion image may be displayed on the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image. More than the image 210 may be displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 29 (G), during the first reach production, by displaying the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image and simultaneously displaying the message image 220 as the result suggesting image, It is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming difficult to understand due to the overlapping display of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image and the message image 220 as the result suggesting image, and the interest can be improved.

  In this embodiment, during the first reach production, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed, and at the same time, the display of the message image 220 as the result suggesting image is terminated, that is, as the operation promotion image. Although the timing of displaying the image 230 of the push button 31B and the timing of ending the display of the message image 220 as the result suggesting image are prevented at the same time, the first reach effect is prevented from being delayed. However, the display of the message image 220 as the result suggesting image may be deleted at a timing prior to displaying the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image. That is, in the present invention, “the effect type suggestion display is ended before the operation promotion display is displayed” means the timing and result suggestion of displaying the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image (operation promotion display). The timing of ending the display of the message image 220 as an image (effect type suggestion display) is set at the same time, and the timing 230 is changed (the image 230 of the push button 31B is displayed as an operation promotion image (operation promotion display). The display of the message image 220 as the result suggesting image is terminated at a timing before the timing of performing the above).

  In the present embodiment, during the first reach production, a message as a result suggestion image is displayed until the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed instead of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image. The mode of ending the display of the image 220 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the message image as the result suggesting image after the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promoting image is displayed. The display of 220 may be terminated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first reach effect can be executed as the effect during the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and the image 210 and the result suggestion image of the plurality of push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images during the first reach effect. After suggesting the effect result of the first post-operation effect by displaying the plurality of message images 220 as, the effect after the first operation is executed. It can be suggested and the interest of the first reach production can be improved.

  Further, in the second reach production of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, as an image 230 of the push button 31 </ b> B as the operation promotion image, an image of the push button 31 </ b> B having a different size (the size is “small”). "The push button 31B image" and the "large" push button 31B image) can be displayed. Further, in the second reach production of the present embodiment, the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image can be changed in a plurality of stages, and the push button having the size “large” as the operation promoting image. The ratio at which the 31B image 230 is displayed differs depending on the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image. For this reason, a player can be made to pay attention to the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the second reach effect, the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image can be changed, and the image 230 of the push button 31B having the size “large” is displayed as the operation promoting image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second reach effect, the operation suggestion image is used as the operation suggestion image. The size of the image 210 of the push button 31 </ b> B can be changed, and the ratio of the image 230 of the push button 31 </ b> B whose size is “large” is displayed as the operation promotion image It may vary depending on the situation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the color change of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is illustrated up to two stages (white → blue and white → blue → red). The color of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is not limited to this, and may be only one level or three or more levels. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example in which the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is changed step by step is illustrated, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the operation is not limited to this. By providing a case where the color of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the suggestion image is changed two or more times by one change, it may be possible to give the player a surprise and improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the display mode of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image, the two push buttons 31B having the sizes “large” and “small” are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more display modes of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image may be provided.

  In the second reach production, the push button 31B image as the operation suggestion image has an image 210 of the white push button 31B and an operation promotion image larger than the image 210 of the white push button 31B. A blue or red push button 31B image 210 having a high ratio of displaying the “large” push button 31B image 230 is provided, and the blue or red push button 31B image 210 is displayed as an operation suggestion image. Since the image 230 of the push button 31B having a size of “small” may be displayed as the operation promotion image, the player may be asked which color image 210 of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation suggestion image. It is possible to attract attention and improve the game entertainment.

  In the present embodiment, in the second reach effect, even if the image 210 of the blue or red push button 31B is displayed as the operation suggesting image, the image 230 of the push button 31B having the size “small” is displayed as the operation promoting image. Although the form which may be displayed is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, As the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image, the size is always “large” as the operation promoting image. A color for displaying the image 230 of the “small” push button 31B may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4 that does not display the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promoting image, the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are displayed. Are displayed over the period L1 in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5, and then the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed at the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5. By stopping and displaying as failure emphasis display over a period L2 longer than the period L1, it is possible to emphasize disappointment that the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is not displayed. It can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4 that does not display the push button 31B image 230 as the operation promoting image, the two push button 31B images 230 as the operation promoting image are produced. Although it is easy for the player to visually recognize that the images of these two push buttons 31B are displayed in an overlapped manner in the center of the display area of the display device 5, the present invention is not limited to this. When the third reach effect is executed in the pattern 4 that does not display the push button 31B image 230 as the operation promotion image, the two push buttons 31B images 230 as the operation promotion image are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. You may overlap and display in areas other than the center. In this case, as the failure emphasis display, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image may be stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4 that does not display the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image, the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion image is produced. After overlapping display over the period L1 in the center of the display area of the display device 5, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as these operation suggestion images are displayed at the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display apparatus 5 from the period L1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the two push buttons 31B serving as operation suggestion images are not limited to this. The period L1 during which the image 210 is displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 is the two push buttons 3 as the operation suggestion images. It may be a period of time L2 than length to display an image 210 of the B in the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 (L1 ≧ L2).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27A, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 1 displaying the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image, the image of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image. 230 is displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 and the third reach effect is executed in the pattern 4 that does not display the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image, the operation suggestion is displayed as failure emphasis display. When the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as images are displayed on the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5, that is, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4, the push buttons as the operation promotion images As an operation suggestion image 210 in an area different from the area where the 31B image 230 is displayed (the center of the display area of the effect display device 5). Since the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promoting an image by displaying an image of the two push buttons 31B can emphasize sorry sense of that it is not displayed, thereby improving the game excitement.

  In the present embodiment, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4, the area where the image 230 of the push button 31 </ b> B as the operation promotion image is displayed (the center of the display area of the effect display device 5) Although the form which displays the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as an operation suggestion image in a different area (left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4, the images of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images in the same region as the region where the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed. At least a part of 210 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the third reach effect can be executed in any one of patterns 1 to 6, and the third reach effect is a push button 31B as an operation promotion image. When the image 230 is executed in any one of the patterns 4 to 6 in which the image 230 is not displayed, the period in which the failure emphasis display is performed is different in each pattern. It can be held, and it can improve amusement entertainment.

  In the present embodiment, the mode in which the failure emphasis display period is changed in all the patterns 4 to 6 of the third reach production is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period for performing failure emphasis display may be the same for all patterns 4 to 6 of the third reach effect, and the period for performing failure emphasis display for at least one pattern may be other patterns. May be different from the period in which failure highlighting is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4 that does not display the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image, the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion image. Are moved and displayed from the left and right ends of the effect display device 5 so as to overlap in the center of the display area, and then the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as these operation suggestion images are displayed from the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. Since it is possible to emphasize that the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is not displayed by making the display areas discrete toward the left and right ends of the display area, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed. Arouse even more willingness to.

  In the present embodiment, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4 that does not display the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image, the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion image is produced. After moving and displaying from the left and right ends of the display device 5 so as to overlap in the center of the display area, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed from the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. Although the form which makes it disperse | distribute toward the right-and-left end part of an area | region is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, When performing a 3rd reach production in the pattern 4, 2 as an operation suggestion image After moving and displaying the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B so as to overlap in the center of the display area from the left and right ends of the effect display device 5, these operation suggestion images are used. It is emphasized that the image 230 of the push button 31B as an operation promoting image is not displayed by giving the player a surprise by deleting the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. In addition, it is possible to further arouse the willingness to display the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A) and 27 (A), when the third reach effect is executed in pattern 1 or pattern 4, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed as effects. The period L in which the display area of the display area of the apparatus 5 is moved and displayed from the left and right ends toward the center is the period in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display apparatus 5 Since the period is longer than L1, it is possible to secure a period for moving and displaying the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images. The attention of the player can be raised, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the third reach effect is executed in the pattern 1 or the pattern 4, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are displayed from the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5. The period L for moving and displaying toward the center is longer than the period L1 for overlappingly displaying the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 (L> L1) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period L1 in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 is displayed. The image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images has a length longer than the period L for moving and displaying from the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center. It may be between (L1 ≧ L).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27A, when the third reach effect is executed with the pattern 4, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are displayed on the effect display device 5. Compared to the period L1 in which the display area is overlapped in the center of the display area, the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed as failure emphasis display in the period L2 displayed on the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5. Since it is longer, it is possible to emphasize disappointment that the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is not displayed, and to display the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image to the player. Arouse even more willingness to.

  In the present embodiment, when the third reach effect is executed in the pattern 4, the period L1 in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 is displayed. The period L2 in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed on the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 as the failure emphasis display is longer (L2> L1). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period L1 in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggesting images are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 fails. A period L2 in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images are displayed on the left and right ends of the display area of the effect display device 5 as the highlight display. It may be the length period of the upper (L1 ≧ L2).

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the second reach effect, the effect of changing the display mode (color) of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image based on the passage of the variation time, that is, the effect However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect of changing the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is a jackpot game. The pre-reading notice effect suggesting that the state is controlled may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. In other words, the “predetermined period before the operation promotion display is displayed” in the present invention means that the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed after the second reach effect is started in the variable display of 1. In addition to the period until the display, the display includes the period until the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed by executing the variable display multiple times. Further, when an effect corresponding to the second reach effect is executed as an effect other than the reach effect such as the changing notice effect, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed after the effect is started. This period corresponds to the “predetermined period before the operation promotion display is displayed” in the present invention.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the display mode (color) of the image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggestion image in the 2nd reach production was illustrated based on progress of change time, this invention illustrated this. As an operation promotion image, in addition to the image 230 of the push button 31B, an image 240 of operation means (for example, the stick controller 31A) that can be operated by a player other than the push button 31B can be displayed. The post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) may be executed based on the player operating the operation means displayed as the operation promotion image. In addition, when the image 230 of the push button 31B and the image 240 of the stick controller 31A can be displayed as the operation promotion image in this way, the image 240 of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation promotion image according to the change display result. To display the image 230 of the push button 31B at different ratios, and to display the image 240 of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image and to display the image of the push button 31B. What is necessary is just to determine the frequency | count of change of the display mode of the operation suggestion image in a different ratio with the case where it is determined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A) to 36 (F) as the first modification, when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined in a state where a plurality of hold memories are stored, first, the effect An image 210 of the white push button 31B as an operation suggesting image is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 5. The display mode of the image of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image (the color of the image of the push button 31B) may be changed every time the variable display is ended or a new variable display is started. Then, as shown in FIGS. 36 (D) to 36 (F), the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is changed to the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 during the variable display of the prefetch target. The push button 31B or the image 230, 240 of the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 (A) to 36 (F), when the second reach effect in the embodiment is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, a predetermined position (for example, the lower left portion) of the display area of the effect display device 5 is used. ) To display the number of reserved memories, it may be easy to understand that the pre-reading notice effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which can change the display mode (color) of the image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggestion image in the 2nd reach production was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this. During the second reach production, as the production different from the second reach production, a suggestion production suggesting that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state may be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37 (A) to 37 (F) as the second modification, the button operation effect is displayed during the display of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image during the second reach effect. Execute. In the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 37 (E), the button operation effect is displayed at the right end of the display area of the effect display device 5 as a position that does not overlap with the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image. An operation promotion image is displayed and operation of push button 31B is received. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (F), on the basis of accepting the operation of the push button 31B by the player, the mini character, the dialogue, and the like are displayed on the right end portion of the display area of the effect display device 5. What is necessary is just to suggest that the fluctuation display result is a big hit and is controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Thus, in the second modification, during the display of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image during the second reach effect, the button operation effect that does not correspond to the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game by making it possible to execute. Furthermore, the display area of the effect display device 5 is not overlapped with the image 210 of the push button 31 </ b> B as the operation suggestion image displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display of the button operation effect from being obstructed by the image of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image and becoming difficult to understand.

  In the second modification, during the display of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image during the second reach effect, the button operation effect as an effect not corresponding to the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other than the button operation effect during the display of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image during the second reach effect. It may be possible to execute the production.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which can change the display mode (color) of the image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggestion image in the 2nd reach production was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this. As modification 3, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (C), it is possible to execute an effect effect in which a character or the like acts on the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image during the second reach effect. The display mode (color) of the image of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image may be changed based on the execution of the action effect. Further, when the action effect can be executed in the second reach effect as described above, as shown in FIG. 38D, even when the action effect is executed, the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is displayed. By providing a case where the mode does not change, the player may be allowed to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the image of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image changes due to the action effect.

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28 (E), in the first reach production, after the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B having the same display mode are displayed as the operation suggestion images, the operation promotion image is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting images are displayed in different modes. Alternatively, the image 230 of the push button 31B may be displayed as an operation promotion image, and the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as operation suggestion images having different modes may be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  Specifically, as Modification 4, the image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggesting image moving from the left end of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center of the display area is used as the effect of the first post-operation effect. The image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggestion image that moves from the right end of the display area of the effect display device 5 toward the center of the display area is displayed in red indicating that the result is a victory. What is necessary is to display in blue which suggests that an effect result is a draw, and to display the left half of the image 230 of the push button 31B as an operation promotion image in red and the right half in blue. By doing in this way, the player can specify the display mode of the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images from the image 230 of the push buttons 31B as the operation promotion images, and at the first post-operation effect. Since the effect result can be predicted from the color of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image, the interest of the effect after the first operation can be improved.

  In the fourth modification, the display mode of the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggestion images can be specified by the color of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image. However, the display form of the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is not limited to this, as long as the display form of the image 210 of the two push buttons 31B as the operation suggesting image can be specified. Good.

  Further, in the first modification, the second reach effect in the above-described embodiment is executed over a plurality of variable displays as a pre-reading notice effect, that is, a plurality of display modes of the image 210 of the push button 31B as an operation suggesting image are performed. Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the image 230 of the push button 31B is finally displayed as the operation promotion image while being changed over the change display of the number of times, the present invention is not limited to this, and Modification 5 As a specific example, a variable display of a plurality of times under a specific condition (for example, a period corresponding to a variable display of 30 times after the end of the big hit game (for example, a special time period that is shorter than a non-reach shift pattern (PA1-1)). The period when the selection ratio of the shortening variation is high) and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the ST machine (the gaming state is controlled to a highly accurate high base state after the big hit game is finished, and the fluctuation display of a specific number of times. When the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state), the gaming state is changed from the high-accuracy base state to the low-accuracy-low base state or high-accuracy The image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 over the 30 display periods until the base state is controlled, and the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image is displayed. The display mode of the image 210 may be changed, and finally the image 230 of the push button 31 </ b> B as the operation promotion image may be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. After the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5, the variable display result becomes a big hit (probability change big hit) based on the player's operation of the push button 31B. Alternatively, it may be informed that it will be out of place.

  In such a case, during the period corresponding to, for example, 30 fluctuation displays after the end of the big hit game, there is a hold storage in which the variable display result is a big hit, or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach changes. The display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31 </ b> B as the operation suggesting image may be changed based on the occurrence of the hold storage to be displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the image 230 of the push button 31B displayed as the operation promotion image by the change in the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image, You can improve your entertainment interests. In the fifth modification, the mode of changing the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image based on the occurrence of the hold storage in which the variable display result is a big hit is exemplified. The display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31 </ b> B as the operation suggesting image may be changed even in a case where a hold storage in which a change in super reach or normal reach is displayed occurs. In addition, a plurality of conditions for changing the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image are provided, and any one of the conditions is satisfied (such as the above-described pending storage in which the variable display result is a big hit) ), The display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image may be changed.

  Furthermore, even if there is no hold storage in which the change display result is a big hit and the hold storage in which the change display is performed with the change pattern of the super reach does not occur, the operation is performed based on the execution of the change display a predetermined number of times. You may change the display mode of the image 210 of the push button 31B as a suggestion image. By doing in this way, the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggestion image even when there is no hold storage in which the change display result is a big hit and the hold storage in which the change display is performed with the change pattern of the super reach does not occur. Can be changed, so that the player can pay attention to the display mode of the image 230 of the push button 31B displayed as the operation promotion image during the predetermined number of times of variable display. Can be improved.

  Further, in the fifth modification, when a pending storage in which the variation display result is a big hit occurs during a plurality of variation displays under a specific condition, in the variation display in which the variation display result is a big hit, the remaining number of fluctuation displays After the temporary stop / re-variation of the effect symbol is executed for the number of times corresponding to, the image 230 of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5, and the push button 31B is displayed by the player. What is necessary is just to alert | report that a fluctuation display result will be a big hit based on having been operated.

  In the above embodiment, when the second reach effect is executed and the variable display result is a big hit (probable big hit), the image of the push button 31B as the operation promotion image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. In the above embodiment, the second post-operation effect is executed based on the fact that the player operates the push button 31B to notify that the variable display result is a big hit (probable big hit). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a sixth modification, when the second reach effect is executed and the variable display result is a big hit (probable big hit), the image of the push button 31B as an operation suggestion image in the display area of the effect display device 5 After displaying 210, the post-second operation effect is executed without displaying the image of the push button 31B as the motion promotion image, and the variable display result is a big hit (probable large change) It may be provided when indicating that a Ri). By doing in this way, a game can be given unexpectedness and a game interest can be improved.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which provides only one display mode of the image 230 of the push button 31B as an operation promotion image in the case of performing a 3rd reach production was illustrated, this invention is limited to this Instead, as a seventh modified example, a plurality of operation promotion image display modes in the case of executing the third reach effect may be provided. As described above, when a plurality of operation promotion image display modes for executing the third reach effect are provided, the operation promotion image of the first display mode (for example, the image of the white push button 31B as the operation promotion image). ) And an operation promotion image of the second display mode (for example, an image of the red push button 31B as the operation promotion image) having a higher ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state than the operation promotion image of the first display mode. When providing the operation promoting image in the first display mode, the operation suggesting image corresponding to the first display mode (for example, the image of the white push button 31B as the operation suggesting image) can be displayed. When displaying the operation promotion image in the second display mode, an operation suggestion image corresponding to the second display mode (for example, an image of the red push button 31B as the operation suggestion image). ) That it allows displaying the, it may be made to focus the player on the display mode of the operation suggestion images. Further, when the third reach effect is executed in any one of the patterns 1 to 3 for displaying the operation promotion image, the operation promotion image is changed to the second display mode (the image of the red push button 31B as the operation promotion image). Display the operation suggestion image corresponding to the first display mode (image of the white push button 31B as the operation suggestion image), thereby giving the player an unexpectedness and displaying the operation promotion image. The interest in display may be improved.

  Moreover, although the said Example illustrated the form which performs either the 1st reach | attainment effect-the 3rd reach | attainment effect as an operation suggestion effect and an operation effect in this invention in the fluctuation | variation display of the fluctuation pattern of a super reach, The motion suggestion effect and the motion effect in the invention may be executed as a change notice effect before the reach effect during the change display, or an effect of notifying the number of rounds of the jackpot game during the jackpot game or a jackpot game You may perform as an effect which alert | reports whether probability change control is performed after completion | finish.

  Moreover, in the said Example, in the fluctuation | variation display of the fluctuation pattern of a super reach, the form which performs only any one effect of the 1st reach effect-the 3rd reach effect as an operation suggestion effect and an operation effect in this invention is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of the effects of the first reach effect to the third reach effect is other effects during the change display (for example, the above-described change notice effect during change). As a result, the motion suggestion effect and the motion effect in the present invention may be executed twice or more during the same variation display.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although push button 31B and stick controller 31A were illustrated as a detection means in this invention, this invention is not limited to this, The detection means of this invention detects the proximity | contact of a player. It may be a detectable infrared sensor, a motion sensor capable of detecting a player's motion, or the like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of gaming balls are inside the gaming machine. The number of loaned balls that are enclosed in a circulating manner and lent in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls that are awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored in the memory. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value.

  Moreover, in the said Example, in order to notify the variation pattern which shows variation modes, such as variation time and the kind of reach production, to CPU120 for production control, the example which transmits one variation pattern designation | designated command when a variation is started. Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 uses the first command to indicate, for example, the variation time and variation mode before reaching reach (when not reaching, before the so-called second stop). The second command indicates the variation time and variation mode after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached), such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect. The command may be transmitted, or only the variation time is notified by the first command and the second command, and the specific variation mode executed at each timing is directed to the direction control CPU 120. You may make it select with. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Thus, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which launches a game ball from the downward direction rather than a game area | region with the hitting ball launcher was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, For example, the said hitting ball launcher is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The game ball may be launched from a position above the game area by providing it at a position above the game area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which only a big hit that can acquire a large number of game balls is generated by opening a big winning opening in the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation jackpot B is suddenly shortened due to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot B by making the opening time of the big prize opening in the round game extremely short so that the player does not recognize that the big prize opening has been opened. It is good also as a sudden big hit that makes it appear as if it is in a probable state. In addition, when these probability variation big hits B are assumed to be sudden big hits, a small hit that opens the big prize opening with the same opening pattern as the opening pattern of the big prize opening in the big hit game of the probability variation big hit B is provided, A state (so-called latent state) in which it is unknown whether the gaming state after the occurrence of the probable big hit B or the small hit is a high probability state or a low probability state may occur. Further, in the case of providing a small hit, a small hit is frequently generated in a high base (a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state), and the player can continuously obtain a prize ball by these frequent small hits. You may do it. In the pachinko gaming machine in which the player can continuously obtain a prize ball by frequent hits in this way, the effects corresponding to the first reach effect to the third reach effect in the embodiment are executed, and these effects are performed. It may be possible to ask whether the state where the small hits frequently occur continues or ends.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the start prize opening two into the 1st start prize opening and the 2nd start prize opening is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, A start prize opening It is good also as one, and it is good also as a start winning opening 3 or more.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two types, the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure, is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Only one special symbol is included. The special symbol may be 3 or more.

  In the embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol as a display result, and then stop display the final stop symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after a variable display of multiple types of special symbols without including the final stop symbol that is the display result, the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be. That is, the final stop symbol as a display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  The state advantageous to the player means a specific game state (big hit etc.) advantageous to a player who can acquire a lot of game media, and a plurality of types of specific game states (expected values of game media that can be acquired) ( A big hit with a different number of rounds), a high base state (time-short state) in which the winning ball payout condition is more easily established than in the normal gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state (high probability state) with a high probability of becoming the specific gaming state ), A high probability low base state (latency probability variation state), a special reach state (for example, super reach, etc.), a state in which the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on the jackpot variation pattern, and the like.

  In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, a game is started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. One game is completed by deriving a variation display result to an effect display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and the variation display result derived to the effect display device is displayed. Accordingly, the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a winning can be generated.

  For example, in a slot machine, in one variable display (1 game) during ART, by executing an effect corresponding to the first reach effect or the third reach effect, the ART continues or ends, or The player may be made to pay attention to whether or not an increase in the number of games occurs, whether or not the game number is controlled to be easily generated.

  In addition, in the slot machine, by executing an effect corresponding to the second reach effect over a plurality of variable displays (multiple games) during the ART, the ART continues or ends, or The player may be focused on whether or not an additional number of games will occur. In addition, when executing an effect equivalent to the second reach effect over a plurality of games in ART, for example, every time a specific combination such as cherry or watermelon is won, The display mode of the image 210 is changed, and in the final game, the push button image 230 as the operation promotion image is changed to “small” at different ratios according to the display mode of the push button image 210 as the operation suggestion image. Alternatively, it may be displayed as “large”. The display mode of the push button image 210 as the operation suggesting image may be changed based on the replay or the fact that a part of the bell is won.

  As described above, in the slot machine, by executing the effects corresponding to the first reach effect to the third reach effect, the player determines whether the ART continues or ends, or whether the number of games is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For the effects corresponding to the first reach effect to the third reach effect in the slot machine, whether the bonus is won, In other words, after the push button image 210 as the operation suggestion image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device, the push button image 230 as the operation promotion image in the display area is displayed. Based on the operation of the push button, the notification that the bonus has been won or the suggestion of the winning combination may be executed as the post-operation effect.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game, and can detect an effect display means (for example, an effect display device 5) and a player's operation. Detection means (for example, push button 31B or stick controller 31A) and effect control means for controlling the execution of effects related to the game (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect symbol variation start processing and the effect symbol variation in-process) ), And the effect control means displays an action promotion display for the player (for example, an image of the push button 31B as the action promotion display) on the effect display means and detects the player's action. An operation effect (for example, a third post-operation effect) and an action suggestion display (for example, an operation suggestion image) that suggests that the operation effect is executed. The operation suggesting effect (for example, the portion displaying the image 210 of the push button 31B as the operation suggesting image in the display area of the effect display device 5) is displayed. The motion suggestion effect may be a success pattern (for example, pattern 1 in the third reach effect) in which the motion promotion display is performed via superimposed display after moving and displaying a plurality of the motion suggestion displays, and a plurality of the motions Including a failure pattern (for example, pattern 4 in the third reach effect) that performs failure emphasis display through superimposed display after moving the suggestion display, and the period corresponding to the failure emphasis display in the failure pattern is the failure pattern. Longer than the period corresponding to the superimposed display (for example, as shown in FIG. The corresponding period L2 is a part longer than the period L1 in which the images 210 of the two push buttons 31B are displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device 5 as operation suggestion images), and further, a specific effect that maintains the effect mode Executable specific effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a specific effect for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051) and the period for maintaining the first mode as the specific effect (sub-image display) The period in which the device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction) and the period in which the second mode is maintained (the period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction) can be produced, and the second mode is maintained. The degree of expectation controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player differs depending on the length of the player (for example, when a specific effect is executed, the sub-image display device 9051 The longer the time is kept in the horizontal direction, the higher the expectation of jackpot, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement interest by increasing the period of failure emphasis display and emphasizing disappointment. Further, attention can also be paid to the period during which the effect mode is maintained.

  It should be noted that the success pattern and the failure pattern in the operation suggesting effect may be associated with the execution of the specific effect for maintaining the effect mode (for example, the specific effect for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). . For example, when a specific effect that maintains the aspect of the effect is performed in the motion suggestion effect, and the motion suggestion effect becomes a success pattern and the motion promotion display is performed, the motion suggestion effect becomes a failure pattern and the motion promotion display is not performed Instead, the period during which the second mode is maintained (for example, the time during which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained horizontally) may be lengthened. In this way, the longer the period in which the second mode is maintained, the higher the expectation that the motion suggestion effect will be a success pattern and the motion promotion display will be performed, and further the expectation for the controlled state to be advantageous. Can improve the game entertainment.

  Further, when the motion suggestion effect is a failure pattern and the motion promotion display is not performed, if the period in which the second mode is maintained is long, the failure emphasis is more than that in the case where the period in which the second mode is maintained is short. You may make it the period corresponding to a display become long. In this way, the game entertainment can be improved by extending the period of failure emphasis and further emphasizing disappointment.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can improve the gaming interest and can also be noticed during the period in which the production mode is maintained, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, A pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like) and a specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the aspect of the effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 that can execute a specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051) As the specific effect, a period for maintaining the first mode (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the portrait orientation) and a period for maintaining the second mode (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the landscape orientation) ) Can be executed differently, and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the length of the period for maintaining the second mode (for example, a specific effect is executed) In case, the sub image display apparatus 9051 is the longer the time that is kept sideways, the high jackpot expectation, etc.) the gaming machine and the like. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 39 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 902. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs, etc. The special symbol which is the special identification information is displayed in a variable manner. For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. At the end of the variable display, the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result, and the variable display result is derived and displayed.

  The variable display result derived and displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B and the special symbol variably displayed indicate numbers “0” to “9” and “−”. It is not limited to what consists of symbols etc. For example, it is only necessary to set a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED is set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. The variable display lighting pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is “second special symbol”. Also called. The special figure game of the first special figure is also referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game of the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”.

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 905, corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game, identification information different from the special symbols in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, for example. The decorative design is variably displayed.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. In response to the start of either the first special game or the second special game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, At 905R, the decoration pattern starts to change. After that, when the variable display result in the special game is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905. The fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, on the screen of the image display device 905, each can be identified in synchronization with the first special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 904B. A plurality of kinds of decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the variable display result is derived and displayed at the end of the variable display.

  It should be noted that, for example, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols, the display of identification information such as decorative symbols is stopped and variable display is terminated. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be stopped and displayed, and for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction may occur. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped only for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  A display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. In the display area 905H, a display that allows the number of special game games whose execution is suspended is specified. The special figure game whose execution has been suspended is a special figure game that has not yet been started, and is stored as a reserved memory. In this embodiment, by storing information for executing the special figure game, the special figure game corresponding to the information is stored as a hold memory. For this reason, the number of reserved special figure games is also referred to as the number of special figure reserved memories. In addition, the display that can specify the number of reserved special game displayed in the display area 905H is also referred to as a stored storage display.

  The special game is suspended, for example, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A or the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Occurs based on. That is, the start condition for executing the special figure game is established, but the special figure game based on the previously established start condition is being executed, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc. Thus, when the start condition for allowing the start of the special figure game is not established, the special figure game corresponding to the established start condition is suspended.

  For example, when the start condition for the first special figure game is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start condition for starting the first special figure game based on the establishment of the first start condition is satisfied. If not, 1 is added to the first special figure holding memory number, and the execution of the first special figure game is put on hold. In addition, when the start condition for the second special figure game is established due to the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start condition for starting the second special figure game based on the establishment of the second start condition is established. If not, 1 is added to the second special figure holding memory number, and the execution of the second special figure game is put on hold. When the execution of the first special figure game is started, 1 is subtracted from the first special figure reserved memory number, and when the execution of the second special figure game is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is subtracted by one. Is done.

  The variable display special figure reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is also referred to as a total reserved memory number. The term “special figure pending storage number” simply refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure pending memory number, the second special figure pending memory number, and the total pending memory number, and particularly refers to a part thereof. It may happen.

  In this embodiment, the hold storage display is performed by displaying the same number of symbol images as the reserved special game. One hold display image corresponds to one special figure game that is being held, and indicates the special figure game that is being held. The hold display image corresponding to the first special figure game is displayed in the area 905HA on the left side of the display area 905H. In the area 905HA, a plurality of display positions of the first hold display image are set, and the first hold display image is displayed left-justified in order from the leftmost display position. The hold display image corresponding to the second special figure game is displayed in the area 905HB on the right side of the display area 905H. In the area 905HB, a plurality of display positions of the second hold display image are set, and the second hold display images are displayed in order from the leftmost display position in order from the left.

  When the first special figure game is executed, the leftmost first hold display image is erased. At this time, if there is another first hold display image, each of the other first hold display images is shifted to the display position on the left side. When the second special figure game is executed, the leftmost second hold display image is erased. At this time, if there is another second hold display image, each of the other second hold display images is shifted to the display position on the left side.

  You may make it provide the indicator which displays the number of special figure reservation memories with the display area 905H instead of the display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 39, the first hold indicator 9025A for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the display area 905H. And a second hold indicator 9025B. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B includes, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, respectively. . Here, the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  A sub-image display device 9051 is provided on the right side of the image display device 905. Similar to the image display device 905, the sub-image display device 9051 is composed of an LCD or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the sub-image display device 9051, an image related to the image displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed, and an effect operation in which the display image on the image display device 905 and the display image on the sub-image display device 9051 are interlocked. Is done. Further, the sub-image display device 9051 is configured so that the front side of the image display device 905 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by, for example, a drive motor 9052 shown in FIG.

  On the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, a small symbol display area 9051V smaller than the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R is provided. On the screen of the sub-image display device 9051 shown in FIG. 39, a small symbol display area 9051V is provided in the lower part. In the small symbol display area 9051V, the small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable symbols and special symbols. The effect image indicating the small design is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 9051V provided on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, the effect image showing the small symbol that becomes the notification information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol that becomes the display result Is derived.

  Thus, on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, variable display of small symbols different from the decorative symbols is performed. During the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols until the finalized decorative symbol that is the display result is derived, the variable display of small symbols continues to be performed in a certain display mode and disappears from the screen or is blocked. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 9051V is configured to be visible at all times, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 9051V. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 9051V are always referred to as small symbols or effect small symbols. In the small symbol display area 9051V, for example, a plurality of types that can be identified by a display mode in which a part or all of a plurality of types of decorative symbols are common, such as a symbol that indicates a number in the same manner as a portion that indicates a number in a decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small symbols may be variably displayed as the notification information image.

  In addition, a 4th symbol is provided after the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and further the normal symbol, and the variable display of the 4th symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The variable display of the 4th symbol is, for example, displayed in a specific display color at regular intervals in the 4th symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 905 or the screen of the sub-image display device 9051. This is realized by continuing display control that repeats non-display. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  Further, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are provided at positions separated from the display screen of the image display device 905, for example, on the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. It has been. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects produced by the display on the image display device 905 or the sub-image display device 9051 has difficulty in confirming the display state on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. It may be difficult to recognize whether variable display of symbols is in progress or whether a display result has been derived. On the other hand, by variably displaying small symbols in the small symbol display area 9051V provided on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051 and deriving a display result, whether or not variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  Below the image display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball apparatus 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B includes an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state that is a vertical position and an open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory. 2 Form a starting prize opening.

  For example, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning port by moving the movable wing piece to the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the OFF state, for example. Become. On the other hand, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is an opening that allows the game ball to enter the second start winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is on. It becomes a state. Note that the normally variable winning ball device 906B is normally opened when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, and the game ball is more easily opened when the solenoid 9081 is in the on state than in the normally opened state. The configuration may be in a state. The normal variable winning ball device 906B only needs to be able to change between, for example, a first variable state and a second variable state in which a game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening as compared with the first variable state.

  The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, the first start opening switch 9022A. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 9022B. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the first special figure holding memory number is less than a predetermined upper limit value, the first start The condition is met. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second special figure holding memory number is less than a predetermined upper limit value, the second start The condition is met.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door, and the large winning as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and prevents the game ball from entering the big winning opening. . On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball easily enters the big winning opening. To do. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball cannot easily enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  A game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when a game ball enters the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, for example, when a gaming ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain the winning ball by allowing the game ball to enter the special prize winning port, and the game is more difficult than the first state. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs as in the case of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. The normal symbol as identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result is derived and displayed at the end of variable display. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game. Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold memory number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041 formed in the game area.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a gaming ball that has entered one of the general winning holes is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 includes an LED. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hitting operation handle that is operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. A dish is provided. A lower plate that holds the excess balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided at the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903.

  A stick controller 9031A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick that is held by the player, and has a trigger button at a predetermined position of the operation stick. The trigger button may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation can be performed by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 9031A with an operating hand. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button or the like may be built in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 9035A including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 9031A or the like. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901, It is configured to include four transmissive photosensors in combination with two transmissive photosensors arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side. Just do it. The controller sensor unit 9035A outputs a signal corresponding to the operation to the stick controller 9031A to the effect control board 9012 in FIG.

  The member that forms the upper plate is provided with a push button 9031B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 9035B that mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects a player's operation performed on the push button 9031B is provided in the body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 9031B is installed. It only has to be. Push sensor 9035B outputs a signal corresponding to an operation to push button 9031B to effect control board 9012 in FIG.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 40 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901. .

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board made up of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of receiving a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 9011 controls the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game by performing on / off control of each of the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In addition, it also has a function of controlling variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the normal game by the normal symbol display 9020 by turning on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020. The main board 9011 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, the general-purpose hold indicator 9025C, and the like, and displaying various hold memory numbers.

  On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the microcomputer 90100 for game control. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball as a game medium like what is called a sensor, for example. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9082 for the big prize door.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 has a function for performing a display operation in the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 909, that is, an electrical component for effects. A function of controlling and executing a predetermined performance operation is provided. The effect control board 9012 has a function of detecting an operation to the stick controller 9031A based on a signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A and a function of detecting an operation to the push button 9031B based on a signal from the push sensor 9035B. In addition, a function of causing a production electric part to perform a production operation according to the detected operation is also provided.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Based on the signal from the effect control board 9012, the sound signal for outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R. A processing circuit for executing the processing is mounted.

  The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Based on the signal from the effect control board 9012, the lamp for turning on / off the game effect lamp 909 and the like. A driver circuit is installed.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal, for example. All the production control commands have, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE, and the second byte indicates EXT. It is sufficient that the first bit of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data is set to “0” in advance.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is a one-chip microcomputer, for example, a ROM 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a RAM 90102 for providing a game control work area. The CPU 90103 is configured to execute a control program by executing a game control program, the random number circuit 90104 to update numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and the I / O 90105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 90103 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that a one-chip microcomputer serving as the game control microcomputer 90100 may include at least the RAM 90102 in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I / O 90105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, the random number circuit 90104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 90104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 90102, and the CPU 90103 The random value may be updated by updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 90101 has table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored.

  In the RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The I / O 90105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. The

  The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations in accordance with a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device. 905 and a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the sub-image display device 9051, and a random number circuit that updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the effect control CPU 90120 90124 and I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing a process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the production control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, the production control CPU 90120 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122, and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the production control CPU 90120 enters the RAM 90122. Variation data reading operation for reading out various variation data temporarily stored, effect control CPU 90120 receiving operation for receiving various signals from outside of effect control board 9012 via I / O 90125, effect control CPU 90120 being an I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, the random number circuit 90124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. The effect random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 90124 like the game random number used on the main board 9011, or the effect control CPU 90120 executes a predetermined computer program. Thus, it may be updated by software.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 40 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects, such as effect control execution data and end codes associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data that is included, is composed of pattern data, and is set as a usage pattern to be described later. In addition, pattern data that directly becomes an effect control pattern is also stored, and the pattern data may be set as an effect control pattern that becomes a use pattern as it is.

  The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 outputs a video signal of an effect image displayed on the image display device 905 or the sub-image display device 9051 based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120, and the image display device 905. The effect image is displayed. As an example, VDP, CGROM, VRAM, or the like may be mounted on the display control unit 90123. Note that the VDP may be a GPU, a GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing called a DSP more generally. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits a display control command for designating an effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905 to the display control unit 90123 according to the display control data included in the effect control pattern. The display control unit 90123 outputs a video signal for displaying an effect image specified by the display control command using data stored in the CGROM or the like according to the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120. As a result, the video signal of the effect image according to the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is output, and the effect image is displayed on the image display device 905.

  An I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051, a control signal transmitted to the audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 are transmitted. Control signals transmitted to the drive motor 9052, and the like. An operation signal corresponding to an operation on the stick controller 9031A is input from the controller sensor unit 9035A to the input port of the I / O 90125, and an operation signal corresponding to an operation on the push button 9031B is input from the push sensor 9035B.

  The image display device 905 includes a display panel including a liquid crystal panel and a driver circuit for driving the display panel. The video signal supplied to the image display device 905 from the display control unit 90123 via the I / O 90125 based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit drives the display panel based on the input video signal, and displays an image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the image display device 905.

  With the configuration described above, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the speakers 908L and 908R via the audio control board 9013 to output sound, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 via the lamp control board 9014. Various effects are executed by displaying effect images in the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123.

  The drive motor 9052 is composed of, for example, a stepping motor, and controls the sub image display device 9051 to rotate clockwise and counterclockwise by driving according to the drive signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012.

  As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor provided in a predetermined hit ball launching device based on a hit operation performed by a player on a hit ball operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the casing in the pachinko gaming machine 901 Thus, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the passing gate 9041 and is detected by the gate switch 9021, the normal symbol start condition for executing the normal game on the normal symbol display 9020 is based on this detection. To establish. Thereafter, the general symbol display device 9020 starts the general symbol game on the basis of the fact that the general symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous general symbol game has been completed.

  In the normal game, after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the opening control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the tilting position, and the predetermined time When it passes, the closing control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  Whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is set to “per normal symbol” as a predetermined specific display result is determined when the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol indicator 9020 or the like. It is determined before derivation display. The variable symbol variable display period is also determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed, such as when a general game is started.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A, the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 9022A. . Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  In addition, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the second start condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the closed state, the gaming ball cannot enter the second start winning opening.

  When the first special figure game is started or when the second special figure game is started, whether or not to change the special symbol variable display result to a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result, This is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result.

  After the special game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol to be a variable display result is derived. Is displayed.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result is “big jackpot”, and the bonus game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a special symbol variable display result, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed, and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “lost”.

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A may be a different special symbol from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in a first state advantageous for the player. Then, in a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated, a round game in which the big winning opening is continuously opened is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 9023, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

  The case where the special symbol variable display result is “big hit” includes the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when a jackpot symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, and when a jackpot symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, The type is “probable change”. As a round game in the big hit game state where the big hit type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”, the normal open round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state advantageous to the player is a predetermined time is 15 It is executed for a predetermined number of times such as a round. The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a normal open big hit state. Note that the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” is referred to as “non-probable big hit game state”. Also, the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” is referred to as “probability big hit game state”. The “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” may be called “non-probable big hit”, and the “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” may be called “probable big hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, the probability display state may be controlled to a probability change state in which the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The short-time state is controlled to continue until one of the short-time end conditions is established first, among a specific number of special game runs and a next big hit game state being started. The In addition, the remaining number of executions of the special figure game until the time-shutdown condition is satisfied may be referred to as the time-shortest remaining number. The short-time state and the probable change state are game states advantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state after the non-probability big hit gaming state ends is a time-short state but does not become a probable variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state after the probability variation big hit gaming state is the short time state and the probability variation control.

  In the short-time state, the normally variable winning ball device 906B is set to the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening than the non-short-time state that is not in the short time state such as the normal state. Change. For example, the normal symbol display 9020 controls that the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol game is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of each normal symbol game is “per normal symbol” The tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per normal figure" compared to the normal state In other words, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B may be changed between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by controlling the length of the ball to be longer, and increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high open control. By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a short-time state, or a probability variation state, and the variable display result in the usual game is `` The probability that the game will be “per game” and the probability that the variable display result in the special game is “hit” will be controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The time-short state is also referred to as “high base state”, “high base”, and the like, and the gaming state that is not the time-short state is also referred to as “low base state”, “low base”, “non-time-short state”, “non-time-short state”, etc. The probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed is also referred to as "high probability state", "high probability", etc., and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is "low probability state", "low probability", "non-probability variation state", "non-probability variation". It is also said. The game state when the probability change state and the short time state are also referred to as “highly accurate and high base state”, “highly accurate and high base”, and the like. The gaming state when the state is in the short time state without entering the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability high base state”, “low probability high base state”, or the like. The gaming state when the state is in the probabilistic state without being in the short-time state is also referred to as “highly accurate low base state”, “highly accurate low base” or the like. The state that does not become either the short-time state or the probability variation state, that is, the normal state is also referred to as “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy low base”, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A. Corresponding to the start of any one of the second special symbol games on the display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the display of the fourth symbol are started. In the first special figure game or the second special figure game, when a fixed special symbol that is a variable symbol display result is derived and displayed, the “left” of the image display device 905 is synchronized with the timing of the derived display. In the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the variable display of the decorative symbols is completed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed.

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end, the variable display mode of the decorative design may become a predetermined reach mode. Here, the reach mode means that the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitute a part of the jackpot combination continue to fluctuate. Or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols that constitute a predetermined jackpot combination are still displayed. The display pattern in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating in the remaining decorative symbol display areas that are not stopped, or all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” In the display mode, the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  During the variable display of the decorative design, a character image different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905, a background image is displayed, or a moving image different from the decorative design is reproduced and displayed. Production is performed. These effects are called effects during variable display together with the variable display of the decorative pattern itself. In other words, the variable display effect is an effect by an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 in accordance with the variable symbol variable display, and is a concept including the variable symbol variable display itself. Thus, the variable display effect is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Making the variable display mode a reach mode is one of the effects during variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect by the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 905, the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation by the game effect lamp 909, etc. The production by etc. may be included.

  A reach effect may be executed as part of the variable display effect. The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode. Reach effects can be achieved by reducing the variation speed of the decorative design, displaying a character image different from the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 905, changing the display mode of the background image, or a moving image different from the decorative design. This is an effect of performing an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach mode by reproducing and displaying the image or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. In this embodiment, the big hit expectation degree when each reach effect is executed is higher in the order of super reach B, super reach A, and normal reach. Note that the big hit expectation is, for example, a ratio at which the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “big hit”, and here, it is also a ratio at which the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol is “big hit”. Hereinafter, in the case of the jackpot expectation level of the special figure game, the jackpot expectation level also includes a ratio at which the variable display result of the decorative symbol becomes “big hit”.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, a so-called pre-reading notice is executed based on the determination at the time of starting winning. The pre-reading notice is a notice of the jackpot expectation degree of the special figure game that is a target of the prefetch determination. In this embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, a hold change effect is provided in which a predetermined image is applied to a target hold display image and the display mode of the hold display image is changed. The on-hold change effect is executed during the execution of the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure game executed before the target. The hold change effect may be executed a plurality of times. At this time, the hold change effect is executed once for each of a plurality of variable displays that are continuous or not continuous, and the final change of the target hold display image. The expected degree of jackpot is announced according to a typical display mode. The pre-reading notice is regarded as an effect separate from the effect during variable display, but may be part of the effect during variable display.

  When the special symbol variable display result is “big hit”, on the screen of the image display device 905, as a variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol, a predetermined decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As an example, when the same decorative design is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the winning combination is confirmed. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed. Note that the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed may differ depending on the jackpot type.

  If the special symbol variable display result is “losing”, the decorative symbol variable display mode is not the reach mode, and the decorative symbol composing the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped as the variable symbol display result. By being displayed, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed. When the special symbol variable display result is “losing”, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination is configured after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode as the variable symbol display result. When the decorative design is stopped and displayed, a fixed decorative design that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 will be described. The main board 9011 controls the progress of the game. Then, the main board 9011 transmits an effect control command to the effect control board 9012 as the game progresses. The effect control board 9012 performs various effects by executing effect control for controlling the image display device 905 and the like based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. As a result, the game executed by the main board 9011 and the various effects executed by the effect control board 9012 are synchronized. Hereinafter, main production control commands will be described with reference to FIG. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number.

  Command 8001 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of the first special figure game, that is, the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of the second special figure game, that is, the start of variable display of the second special figure. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command. Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special figure or variable display of the second special figure may be included in a later-described variation pattern designation command. The change start designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

  Command 81XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern for variable display of special symbols and variable display of decorative symbols. A numerical value corresponding to each variation pattern is set in “XX” of the command. Further, the variation pattern designation command may be a command for designating the variation start of the decorative symbol. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

  Command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit and a type of big hit. In this embodiment, a display result designation command corresponding to each variable display result is set. For example, a numerical value corresponding to the display result is set in “XX” in the command. The display result designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command for designating the end of the special figure game. The symbol confirmation designation command is for designating that the variable display of decorative symbols is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. The symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted at the end of the special game.

  Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command for designating the background of the effect image displayed on image display device 905. In this embodiment, the background is changed according to the gaming state. For this reason, the background designation command also designates a gaming state. A numerical value corresponding to the background is set in “XX” in the command. The background designation command is transmitted at a timing when the gaming state can be changed, at the start of a special figure game, or the like.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a big hit gaming state. The fanfare is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state. This is an effect to notify that a big hit gaming state has been reached. This command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

  Command A300 (H) is an effect control command for designating the end of the big hit gaming state. Note that the ending is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. This command is sent at the end of the last round game.

  Command B100 (H) is an effect control command for designating that a first start prize has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the first start prize opening. Command B200 (H) is an effect control command for designating that a second start prize has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the second start prize opening. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command. The start winning designation command is transmitted when a start winning is generated.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command that designates that the first start winning prize is generated and the first special figure reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the second start prize is generated and the second special figure holding memory number increases by one. These commands may be collectively referred to as a special figure reserved memory number addition designation command. The special figure reserved memory number addition designation command is transmitted when a start winning is generated.

  Command C200 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the first special figure holding memory number is decreased by one when the first special figure game is executed. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the second special figure holding memory number is decreased by one when the second special figure game is executed. These commands may be collectively referred to as special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation commands. The special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is transmitted when the special figure game is started.

  The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a determination result of the prefetch determination at the time of starting winning. As will be described in detail later, random numbers MR′1 to MR3 ′ used to determine whether or not to make a big hit, a big hit type, and a variation pattern when the first start winning or the second starting win occurs. Extracted. In this embodiment, for the special figure game corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′, the random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ extracted before the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied. Based on the random number value MR1 ′, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special figure game is “big hit”. The prefetch determination refers to this determination, and the prefetch determination is performed in a winning random number determination process in step S90211 described later. The determination result of the prefetch determination is set to “XX” in the winning determination result designation command. The winning determination result designation command is transmitted when a start winning is generated.

  Next, main operations of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the present embodiment will be described. In the following, the operation will be described with reference to a flowchart or the like, but in each operation, processing that does not appear in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

  In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes, for example, a predetermined process as a game control main process. In the game control main process, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings and the like after setting the interrupt disabled.

  When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC supplied every predetermined period and accepts an interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state, for example, a predetermined game control timer interrupt Execute the process.

  In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 90103 performs a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 such as a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. A process for controlling the progress of the process is executed. At the end of the game control timer interrupt process, the interrupt permission state is set. As a result, the game control timer interrupt process is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, every predetermined time, which is the supply interval of the interrupt request signal.

  The switch processing is performed by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. In this process, whether or not the switch is turned on is determined for each switch, and the determination result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. The determination result stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is used in special symbol process processing and normal symbol process processing described later.

  The main-side error process is a process for making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

  The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example.

  The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software. As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side include a random number value MR1 ′ for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 ′ for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR3 ′ for determining a variation pattern. As long as it is included.

  The random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. The value can be any of "" to "65535".

  The random value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type is a random value used for determining the big hit type as “probable change” or “non-probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It can take any value from “0” to “99”.

  The random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance. Can take any value of ~ 99.

  In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is set to “big hit”. Determination of whether or not to control in gaming state, determination of jackpot type and variation pattern, control of display operation in special symbol display device 904 based on the determination result, winning prize in special variable winning ball device 907 in jackpot gaming state Various processes are selected and executed in order to set the opening / closing operation of the mouth in a predetermined procedure. Details of the special symbol process will be described later, but by executing the special symbol process every time a timer interrupt occurs, the variable display result and the variation pattern are determined, the special figure game is executed based on the result, and the jackpot gaming state Etc. are realized.

  In the normal symbol process, for example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 9041, if the number of reserved games does not reach the upper limit, the stored figure is stored, or the stored game is used for variable display of the standard game. The result or variation pattern is determined, the display operation in the normal symbol display 9020 is controlled according to the variation pattern, and the normal symbol variable display is executed, and the variable display result of the normal game is derived and displayed. In the case of “per day”, a process of opening the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is performed. By executing the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupt occurs, the normal game is executed, the open state of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B for a predetermined period when the normal game is hit, and the like are realized.

  The command control process is a process for transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in special symbol process processing and normal symbol process processing, control command transmission setting is performed, and in command control processing, processing for actually transmitting the transmission-set control command to the effect control board 9012 is performed. Done.

  Next, the special figure process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is turned on ( Step S90201). For example, when the first start port switch 9022A is on when the determination result determined that the first start port switch 9022A is on is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the switch process. What is necessary is just to judge. If the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201; YES), whether or not the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the first special figure game is a predetermined upper limit value. Is determined (step S90202). At this time, the CPU 90103 identifies the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first special figure reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first special figure reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. I can do it. If the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; NO), the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is set to “1”. Setting is performed (step S90203).

  When the first start port switch 9022A is OFF in step S9021 (step S9021; NO), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S9022 (step S90202; YES), normal It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 906B is turned on (step S90204). For example, the second start port switch 9022B is turned on when the determination result determined that the second start port switch 9022B is turned on in the switch process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. What is necessary is just to judge. When it is determined that the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90204; YES), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the second special figure game becomes a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90205). At this time, the CPU 90103 specifies the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second special figure reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the second special figure reserved memory number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. I can do it. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; NO), the starting port buffer value is set to “2” (step S90206). If the second start port switch 9022B is not on (step S90204; NO), or if the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S90205; YES), the start winning determination process is terminated.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S90203 and S90206, the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure reserved memory number count value is increased. Add one. Thus, the first special figure reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the first start condition in which the game ball enters the first start winning opening is satisfied. Further, the second special figure reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the second start condition in which the game ball enters the second start winning opening is satisfied. At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to add 1 (step S90208).

  After executing the process of step S90208, the CPU 90103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S90209). As an example, in the process of step S90209, among the numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90104 or the RAM 90102, a random value MR1 ′ for determining a special figure display result and a jackpot type determining The numerical data indicating the random value MR2 ′ and the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. When the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 90103 controls the first hold indicator 9025A to display a display capable of specifying the first special figure hold storage number added by one. You may make it make 1st holding | maintenance indicator 9025A perform. When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 90103 controls the second hold indicator 9025B to display a display that can specify the number of the second special figure hold memory added by one. You may make it make the 2nd holding | maintenance display device 9025B perform.

  The first special figure holding storage unit shown in FIG. 44 (A) has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the first start winning has occurred, but has not yet started. The hold data of the first special figure game is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the order of winning in the first starting winning opening, and the CPU 90103 extracts from the random number circuit 90104 or the like based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball The stored random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern, etc. are reserved data, and the stored number is a predetermined upper limit value. Remember until you reach. In this embodiment, in this way, the first special game that has not yet been started is stored as the hold memory.

  The second special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 44 (B) is not yet started, although the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B and the second start winning has occurred. There is no second special figure game hold data stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the order of winning in the second starting winning opening, and the CPU 90103 extracts from the random number circuit 90104 or the like based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball The reserved random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type, the numerical value data indicating the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern, etc. are set as the reserved data, and the number is set to a predetermined upper limit Remember until you reach it. In this embodiment, in this way, the second special game that has not yet been started is stored as the hold memory.

  Thereafter, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S90211). FIG. 45A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a winning random number determination process. In the winning random number determination process, if the starting port buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 first transmits the first start figure reserved memory number addition designation command after setting the transmission of the first starting prize designation command. If the setting is made and the start port buffer value is “2”, the transmission setting of the second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command is performed after the second start winning designation command transmission setting (step S90401).

  Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the current state is a big hit gaming state (step S90402). Whether or not the current state is a big hit gaming state can be specified by, for example, a value of a special figure process flag described later. Here, if it is “4” to “7”, it is in the big hit gaming state. When the value of the special figure process flag is other than “4” to “7” and the game state is not in the big hit gaming state (step S90402; NO), it is determined whether or not the current state is the short time state (step S90403). Whether or not the current time is in the short-time state may be specified by the state of the short-time flag. If the time reduction flag is on and the current time is in the time reduction state (step S90403; YES), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “2” (step S90404).

  When the start port buffer value is “2” (step S90404; YES), or when the time-saving state is not in effect (step S90403; NO), the CPU 90103 is currently suspended based on the random value MR1 ′ extracted in step S90209. It is determined whether or not the display result of the special figure game is “big hit” (step S90405). In this determination, the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table referred to when determining the special figure display result at the start of the special figure game is referred to. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. It only has to be assigned to “Lose”. When the gaming state is a non-probability change state that is not a probability change state, the first special figure display result determination table is referred to, and when the game state is a probability change state, the second special figure display result determination table is referred to. Whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state may be specified based on a probability variation flag provided in the RAM 90102 and turned on when the probability variation state.

  In step S90405, the CPU 90103 sets the range of determination values assigned to “big hit” in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table as a big hit determination range. If it is the probability variation state, “8000” to “9899” is set as the jackpot determination range, and if it is the non-probability variation state, “8000” to “8189” is set as the jackpot determination range. Then, it is determined whether the current random number value MR1 ′ is within the set jackpot determination range.

  When it is determined that the current random number value MR1 ′ is within the big hit determination range and the special figure display result of the special figure game held this time is “big hit” (step S90405; YES), the big hit is designated as the determination result. Transmission setting of a winning determination result designation command is performed (step S90406). Since the EXT data “02” is set as the jackpot determination result (see FIG. 45B), the winning determination result designation command including the data is set to be transmitted.

  When the random number MR1 ′ is not within the jackpot determination range, and it is determined that the special figure display result of the special figure game held this time is “losing” (step S90405; NO), the winning time for designating the loss as the determination result The transmission setting of the determination result designation command is performed (step S90407). Since the EXT data “01” is set as the determination result of the losing (see FIG. 45B), transmission setting of a winning determination result specifying command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

  When the special figure process flag value is “4” to “7” and the jackpot gaming state is in effect (step S90402; YES), or when the start port buffer value is “1” (step S90404; NO), the pre-reading notice In order to limit the execution of the game, transmission setting of a determination result designation command at the time of winning that designates no determination as a determination result is performed (step S90408). As a result, execution of the pre-reading notice is limited on the effect control board 9012 side. Since the EXT data “00” is set as the determination result without determination (see FIG. 45B), the winning determination result designation command including the data in the EXT data is set to be transmitted.

  By restricting the execution of the prefetch effect for the first start prize in the short-time state or the start prize in the jackpot game state, it is possible to prevent the execution of the prefetch effect at an inappropriate timing.

  After steps S90406, S90407, and S90408, the winning random number determination process ends.

  Note that one set of commands set to be transmitted in the process is collectively transmitted as a start winning command in the subsequent command control process. The set of the first start winning designation command, the first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command, and the winning determination result designation command is referred to as a first start winning command, a second start winning designation command, and a second special figure hold. A set of a memory number addition designation command and a winning determination result designation command is referred to as a second start winning command.

  Returning to FIG. 45, after the winning random number determination process in step S90211, the CPU 90103 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S90212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S90212; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90213), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S90212; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90214). The process proceeds to step S90204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B detect a valid start winning of a game ball at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be surely completed.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 shown in FIG. 42, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes in steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. And execute.

  The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S90110 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol hold storage number is “0” (step S90231). The CPU 90103 may determine whether or not the second special figure reservation storage number count value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; NO), for example, the reservation data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 such as the head area of the second special figure storage part The numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out (step S90232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning in the second start winning opening in the process of step S90209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second special figure reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory number is updated. The stored contents in the hold storage unit are shifted (step S90233). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit is shifted up by one entry. Further, in the process of step S90233, the total number of reserved memories may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the special fluctuation figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to “2” (step S90234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S90235). The CPU 90103 may determine whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number count value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the second special figure game is started with priority over the first special figure game.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90235 (step S90235; NO), for example, the reservation data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 such as the head area of the first special figure storage part The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read (step S90236). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning in the first start winning opening in the process of step S90209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90236, for example, by updating the first special figure reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating it, the first special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the first special figure reserved memory number is updated. The stored contents in the holding storage unit are shifted (step S90237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted up by one entry. Further, in the process of step S90237, the total number of reserved memories may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S90238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining a special figure display result. For example, the CPU 90103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 47 (A) as a use table when the current state is in the uncertain change state, and the current state shown in FIG. 2 Set the special figure display result determination table as a use table. In each special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the “big hit” or “lost” as the determination result. It only has to be.

  The CPU 90103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result included in the game random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S90232 or S90236 from the random number buffer for variation, and reads the read random number MR1 Based on the numerical data indicating ', the first or second special figure display result determination table set as the use table is referred to, and matches the random value MR1' in the referred first or second special figure display result determination table. The “big hit” or “lost” assigned to the determined value may be determined as the special figure display result of this time. When the random value MR1 ′ is “9000”, the CPU 90103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” with reference to the second special figure display result determination table when the probability variation flag is in the on state. When the probability variation flag is in the off state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” with reference to the first special figure display result determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” at a higher decision ratio than in the non-probability variation state. Therefore, for example, by the big hit end processing in step S90117 shown in FIG. 42, the current probability is in the probability change state based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability change”. Sometimes, the special figure display result is more likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be a big hit gaming state than in the non-probable change state. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the current state is in a probabilistic state.

  Thereafter, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S90239 is “big hit” (step S90240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S90240; YES), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to the ON state (step S90241). Further, the big hit type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. For example, the CPU 90103 sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 48 as a use table. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type may be assigned to “non-probability change” or “probability change” as a determination result. .

  The CPU 90103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S90232 or S90236 from the random number buffer for variation and reads it from the random number buffer for variation. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type, the big hit type determining table set in the use table is referred to and assigned to the determined value matching the random number MR2 ′ in the referenced big hit type determining table. In addition, “non-probability change” or “probability change” may be determined as the current jackpot type.

  After executing the process of step S90242, the determined jackpot type is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 may store the big hit type by storing the big hit type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the big hit type in the big hit type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S90240; NO), or after step S90243, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined (step S90244). As an example, if it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S90242. Can be determined as a confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S90244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S90245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S90245, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed.

  If the number of reserved memories of the first special figure game is “0” in step S90235 (step S90235; YES), after a predetermined demonstration display setting is made (step S90246), the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In this demonstration display setting, for example, whether an effect control command for designating the start of demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 has been transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Determine whether or not. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not transmitted, the demonstration display start designation command is set to be transmitted, and then the demonstration display setting is ended. In the effect control board 9012, when a demonstration display start designation command is transmitted, a demonstration screen is displayed.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 of FIG. 42 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S90111 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). When the big hit flag is ON (step S90261; YES), the big hit hour fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table (step S90262). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S90261; NO), the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined with reference to the variation pattern determination table for losing (step S90263).

  FIG. 50 shows a specific example of the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, variation patterns PA1′-1, PA2′-1, PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 are prepared as the loss variation patterns. Further, variation patterns PB3′-2 to PB3′-4 are prepared as the big hit variation patterns.

  Of the variation patterns at the time of loss, the variation patterns PA1′-1 and PA2′-1 are non-reach variation patterns that specify non-reach. The fluctuation pattern PA2′-1 is a non-reach fluctuation pattern for a short time when the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than usual. Of the variation patterns at the time of loss, the variation patterns PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 are reach variation patterns that specify reach. The fluctuation pattern PA3′-2 is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The fluctuation pattern PA3′-3 is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates development from normal reach execution to super reach A. The variation pattern PA3′-4 is a reach variation pattern that designates development from normal reach execution to super reach B.

  The variation pattern PB3′-2 of the big hit hour variation pattern is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of normal reach. The fluctuation pattern PB3′-3 is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates development from normal reach execution to super reach A. The fluctuation pattern PB3′-4 is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates development from normal reach execution to super reach B.

  In step S90262, for example, the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 51, in the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination only needs to be assigned to one of the big hit variation patterns that are the determination results. In step S90262, the CPU 90103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 ′ read from the variation random number buffer, and refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table to be referred to. Any one of the variation patterns PB3′-2 to PB3′-4 assigned to the determined value that matches the random value MR3 ′ may be determined as the current big hit variation pattern.

  In FIG. 51, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of the determination value. In the actual table, it is only necessary to assign a determined value in a range corresponding to the determined ratio in FIG. For example, in FIG. 51, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB3′-2 is 10/100, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB3′-3 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB3′-4 is 70/100. Since the change pattern PB3′-2 is assigned 100, the decision values 0 to 9 to be compared with the random number value MR3 ′ are assigned, and the change pattern PB3′-3 has the decision values 10 to 29 to be compared with the random value MR3 ′. The determined values 30 to 99 to be compared with the random value MR3 ′ are allocated to the variation pattern PB3′-4. The same applies to other tables in which the determination ratio is described.

  In step S90263, when the current gaming state is the non-time saving state, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52A is referred to. When the current gaming state is the short-time state, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52B is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the first to second loss variation pattern determination tables, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination is one of the variation patterns at the time of loss that is the determination result. It only needs to be assigned. In step S90263, the CPU 90103 determines which of the first or second loss variation pattern determination table is set as the use pattern based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 ′ read from the variation random number buffer. Any of the variation patterns PA1'-1, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 assigned to the decision value matching the random value MR3 'in the first or second variation pattern determination table for reference Or any one of the variation patterns PA2′-1, PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 may be determined as the current loss variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 52, the fluctuation pattern PA2'-1 having a short special figure fluctuation time is easily selected in the time-short state, and the average in the time-short state is greater than that in the non-time-short state. The variable display time can be shortened, and the occurrence of invalid start winnings can be suppressed, and the stoppage of the game ball by the player can be reduced. Moreover, the execution frequency of variable display can be increased.

  Referring to FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, at the time of big hit, the fluctuation pattern PB3′-4 for executing super reach B, the fluctuation pattern PB3′-3 for executing super reach A, and the fluctuation pattern PB3′-2 for executing normal reach are in this order. The decision rate is high. The determination rate of each variation pattern at the time of losing is reversed. For this reason, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result is “big hit” at the highest rate. Then, in the order of super reach A and normal reach, the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” decreases.

  After executing step S90262 or S90263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (step S90264). The special symbol variation time that becomes the variable display time of the special symbol is a time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed. The special figure fluctuation time is specified by each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 90103 sets the special figure fluctuation time designated by the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of step S90262 or S90263, thereby changing the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The timing at which the display result is derived can be set. The special figure variation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure variation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  Following the process of step S90264, any one of the first special symbol games in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 904B that satisfies the start condition. Is set to start the variation of the special symbol (step S90265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. When starting the first special figure game, the CPU 90103 controls the first hold indicator 9025A to display a display capable of specifying the first special figure hold memory number obtained by subtracting one from the first hold indicator 9025A. You may make it carry out. Further, when starting the second special figure game, the CPU 90103 controls the second hold indicator 9025B to display a display that can specify the second special figure hold memory number obtained by subtracting one from the second hold indicator 9025B. You may make it carry out.

  Thereafter, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 side of the special figure display result, the variation pattern determination result, etc., command transmission setting at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol is performed (step S90266). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, the background designation command are used as the fluctuation start command corresponding to the first special figure game. The transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the first special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is performed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, the background designation command are used as the fluctuation start command corresponding to the second special figure game. Then, transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the second special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is performed. These commands are sequentially transmitted by one timer interruption in the subsequent command control processing.

  After executing the process of step S90266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S90267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S90267, the special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the next timer interruption occurs.

  The special symbol variation process in step S90112 of FIG. 42 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S90111 has elapsed. For example, by subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer for which the initial value was set in step S90111 and determining whether or not the subtracted timer value has become “0”, whether or not the special figure variation time has elapsed What is necessary is just to determine. When the timer value of the game control process timer is not 0, the special figure variation time has not elapsed, so the control for executing the variable display of the special figure in the special figure game is performed and the first special symbol display device 904A or In the second special symbol display device 904B, a process for changing the special symbol is performed, and the special symbol changing process is ended. On the other hand, when the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0 and the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display The device 904B performs control to stop the variation of the special symbol, stops the fixed special symbol resulting in the variable symbol special display result, sets the transmission of the symbol fixed designation command, and sets the value of the special symbol process flag to “3”. Update to "". By repeatedly executing step S90112 when a timer interrupt occurs, variable display of special symbols, derivation display of fixed special symbols, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the big hit flag is on. When the big hit flag is in the on state, the time reduction flag and the probability change flag are reset, and the count value of the time reduction number for counting the remaining number of times of variable display executed in the time reduction state provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set. A process of resetting to “0” is performed. Then, a timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time is set as an initial value in the game control process timer. Then, “15” is set as an initial value in a round number counter provided in the RAM 90102 for counting round games. After that, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command is made, and the special symbol process flag is updated to “4”, thereby completing the special symbol stop process. Here, since the gaming state may be changed, a background designation command may be set for transmission.

  When the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the hourly flag is on. When it is on, “1” is subtracted from the count value of the hourly number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the count value after subtracting “1” is “0”. If the count value is “0”, the time-short state is terminated because the time-short state is terminated. In order to finish, the time reduction flag is turned off. Thereafter, transmission setting for transmitting the background designation command is performed based on the state of the probability variation flag. When the time flag is off, the count value after subtracting “1” is not “0”, or after setting the background designation command transmission, the special process flag value is updated to “0”, etc. The special symbol stop process is terminated.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit release pre-processing, for example, the timer value of the game control process timer is subtracted. If the timer value after the subtraction is not “0”, the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so the big hit release pre-processing ends. When the timer value after subtraction is “0”, the fanfare waiting time has elapsed and the round game start timing has come. In this case, the game control process timer is set to a timer value corresponding to the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened by starting the execution of the round game in the big winning gaming state and opening the big winning opening. The process to perform is performed. When the process of setting the big prize opening to the open state or the like is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. By repeating step S90114 every time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game, opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This big hit release process includes a process for subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer, a timer value after 1 subtraction, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 in one round game, and the like. Based on this, processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included.

  When it is determined that the timer value after subtracting 1 has reached 0, or the number of detected game balls has reached a predetermined number, it is time to close the grand prize opening, so the grand prize opening is closed. The process of returning to, the process of setting a timer value corresponding to the closing time of the special winning opening in the game control process timer, the process of subtracting 1 from the count value of the round number counter, etc. are executed. If the timer value after decrementing by 1 does not become 0 and the number of detected game balls has not reached the predetermined number, the process of maintaining the open state of the big prize opening is performed to release the big hit End the middle process. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, and the big hit opening process is terminated.

  By repeating step S90115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the big prize opening is maintained until the timing of returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state, and finally the big prize opening is closed.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the processing after the big hit release, processing for determining whether the count value of the round number counter has become “0”, processing for decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when it is not “0”, etc. Done.

  If it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is “0”, it means that the round game has reached the upper limit number of times, so that the timer value corresponding to the ending waiting time doctor is added to the game control process timer. Set to timer. Also, a setting is made to transmit a hit end designation command, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”.

  When the process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0. If not, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state Is maintained, and the processing after the big hit release ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the game control process timer is set to the timer value corresponding to the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened and the period for which the big prize opening is opened. The process to perform is performed. When a process or the like for opening the big prize opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is set to “5”.

  Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S90115 and S90116 for each timer interruption after the big winning opening is opened in step S90114.

  The big hit end process in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end process, a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer is performed. If the timer value decremented by 1 is not 0, the ending is not finished, and the jackpot ending process is finished as it is. When the timer value decremented by 1 reaches 0, the ending is completed, so the states of the hour / hour flag, the hour / times counter, the probability variation flag, etc. are set according to the big hit type stored in the big hit type buffer.

  For example, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the big hit type is “probability change”. If it is a probability change, the CPU 90103 turns on the time reduction flag and the probability change flag, and sets the initial value to the time reduction counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 Is set to “100”. If the big hit type is “non-probable change”, only the time reduction flag is turned on, and “100” is set as the initial count value in the time reduction counter. Thereafter, various data such as game control process timer, jackpot type buffer setting value, various flag states, etc. are appropriately reset, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, main operations in the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process, for example. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process, clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, sets the register of the CTC mounted on the production control board 9012, and the like. I do. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 is on. The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time elapses in a timer interrupt process that is executed separately from the effect control main process, for example, based on register settings of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits. For this reason, a command analysis process, an effect control process process, and the like, which will be described later, are executed every time a timer interrupt occurs.

  On the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 among the input ports included in the I / O 90125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis processing, for example, an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer is read and analyzed, and settings and control corresponding to the analysis result are performed. Do.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 are performed with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices. Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed. In the effect random number update process, numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter in the RAM 90122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control. Thereafter, the determination as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on is performed again.

  Next, command analysis processing will be described. In the command analysis process, the received command stored in the effect control command reception buffer is analyzed to identify which effect control command is the received command, and a process corresponding to the specified effect control command is performed. When a plurality of reception commands are stored in the effect control command reception buffer, each reception command is analyzed.

  FIG. 53 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis and the processing content corresponding to the effect control command. Note that each command reception flag and each command storage area in FIG. 53 are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. Setting each command reception flag means turning the flag on. Note that the state of each command reception flag and the command stored in each command storage area may be reset or deleted at an appropriate timing. A first start winning command buffer and a second starting winning command buffer are also provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, a hold display number serving as a buffer number is set in the first start winning command buffer. A set of commands including a first start winning designation command, a first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command, and a winning determination result designation command is a storage area corresponding to the first pending display numbers “1” to “4”. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (B), a hold display number serving as a buffer number is set in the second start winning command buffer. A set of commands including a second start winning designation command, a second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command, and a winning determination result designation command is a storage area corresponding to the second pending display numbers “1” to “4”. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area.

  The winning determination result designation command is stored in the first start prize designation command reception buffer when the first start prize designation command reception flag is on, and the second start is designated when the second start prize designation command reception flag is on. Stored in the command buffer when winning. In one start prize, the start prize designation command is transmitted before the prize determination result designation command, so that it depends on the state of the first start prize designation command reception flag and the second start prize designation command reception flag. By specifying the storage location of the start winning designation command, each command of the first start winning command transmitted from the main board 9011 when the first start winning is generated is stored in the first start winning command buffer as one set. Then, each command of the start prize command transmitted from the main board 9011 when the second start prize is generated is stored in the second start prize command buffer as one set.

  Also, each of the 1-1st to 1-4th winning determination result designation command reception flags in FIG. 53 is provided corresponding to each of the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the first starting winning command buffer. When the winning determination result designation command is stored in the first start winning prize command buffer, among the 1-1 to 1-4 winning prize determination result designation command reception flags, the winning determination result stored this time The flag corresponding to the hold display number of the specified command is turned on. For example, when a winning determination result designation command is stored in correspondence with the hold display number “1”, the first-first winning determination result designation command reception flag is turned on, and in correspondence with the hold display number “2”. When the winning determination result specifying command is stored, the 1-2 winning determination result specifying command reception flag is turned on, and when the winning determination result specifying command is stored corresponding to the hold display number “3”, When the 1-3 winning prize determination result designation command reception flag is turned on and the winning decision result designation command is stored in correspondence with the hold display number “4”, the 1-4 winning prize determination result designation command reception flag is set. Turn on.

  Each of the 2-1 to 2-4 prize determination result designation command reception flags in FIG. 53 is provided corresponding to each of the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the second start prize command buffer. When the winning determination result designation command is stored in the second start winning prize command buffer, the winning determination result designation command stored this time among the 2-1 to 2-4 winning judgment result designation command reception flags is stored. The flag corresponding to the on-hold display number is turned on. For example, when the winning determination result designation command is stored in correspondence with the hold display number “1”, the second-first winning determination result designation command reception flag is turned on, and the corresponding to the hold display number “2”. When the winning determination result specifying command is stored, the 2-2 winning determination result specifying command reception flag is turned on, and when the winning determination result specifying command is stored in correspondence with the hold display number “3”, When the 2-3 winning prize determination result designation command reception flag is turned on and the winning prize determination result designation command is stored in correspondence with the hold display number “4”, the 2-4 winning prize determination result designation command reception flag is set. Turn on.

  The 1-1st to 1-4th prize determination result designation commands and the 2-1st to 2-4th prize determination result designation commands may be collectively referred to as prize determination result designation commands.

  The winning determination result specifying command is transmitted last in one starting winning command, so whether or not a new starting winning command has been received depending on the state of each winning determination result specifying command reception flag. In addition, it is possible to specify which of the first display winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer is stored in correspondence with which hold display number the newly received start winning command is stored.

  Since the first start winning game command is transmitted from the main board 9011 in response to occurrence of the hold of the first special figure game, when the hold of the first special figure game occurs, it is stored in the first start winning game command buffer. One set of received commands to be stored is increased by one. The second start winning time command is transmitted from the main board 9011 in response to the occurrence of the second special figure game hold, so that the second start winning game corresponding to the occurrence of the second special figure game hold. One set of received commands stored in the command buffer is increased by one.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when the first special figure game is executed, the first start winning command stored in correspondence with the first hold display numbers “2” to “4” is the higher-numbered command. 1 is shifted to the hold display numbers “1” to “3”. When the second special figure game is executed, the second start winning command stored in correspondence with the second hold display numbers “2” to “4” is the second hold display number “1” of the higher number. "To" 3 ".

  With the configuration as described above, the hold display number in the first start winning command buffer and the hold number in the first special figure holding storage unit are stored corresponding to the same number, and the first start winning command and hold data are stored. Therefore, the number of first start winning prize commands stored in the first start winning prize command buffer is the same as the first special figure hold memory number of the first special figure game. Also, the hold display number in the second start winning command buffer and the hold number in the second special figure hold storing unit are stored corresponding to the same number, and the second start winning command and hold data correspond to each other. Thus, the number of second start winning prize commands stored in the second start winning prize command buffer is the same as the second special figure holding memory number of the second special figure game.

  Each hold display number in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer also corresponds to each display position of the hold display image. Specifically, each hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to each display position of the first hold display image provided in the area 905HA of the display area 905H, and the hold display number “1” is Corresponding to the leftmost display position in the area 905HA, the hold display number “2” corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 905HA, and the hold display number “3” is the third display position from the left in the area 905HA. The hold display number “4” corresponds to the fourth display position from the left in the area 905HA. Each hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to each display position of the second hold display image provided in the area 905HB of the display area 905H, and the hold display number “1” is in the area 905HB. Corresponding to the leftmost display position, the hold display number “2” corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 905HB, and the hold display number “3” corresponds to the third display position from the left in the area 905HB. The hold display number “4” corresponds to the fourth display position from the left in the area 905HB.

  In addition, a hold change effect execution pattern and an action effect execution pattern are stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer, respectively. The hold change effect execution pattern, which will be described in detail later, designates the execution pattern of the hold change effect, and is stored in correspondence with the start winning command corresponding to the special game of the target of the hold change effect. . Similarly, the action effect execution pattern designates the action effect execution pattern, and is stored in correspondence with the start winning command corresponding to the special game of the target of the action effect.

  In the start winning command buffer of FIG. 54, “0000 (H)” indicates that no command is stored, and “−” stores both the pending change effect execution pattern and the action effect execution pattern. Indicates that it has not been.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the command analysis process, when the background designation command is received, the state of the high-accuracy flag and the state of the high base flag are switched according to the background designated by the background designation command.

  Next, the production control process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes the hold change effect setting process (step S90161), and then executes the following depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122. Any one of the processes in steps S90170 to S90175 is selected and executed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hold change effect setting process. In the hold change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a new start winning command is received this time (step S90671). For example, if any of the 1-1st to 1st-4th winning determination result designation command reception flags and the 2-1st to 2nd-4th winning determination result designation command reception flags are on, the engine is started. Since the winning command is newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer, it is determined that a new start winning command has been received. When a plurality of flags among the above-described winning determination result designation command reception flags are in the ON state, the second start winning command with the largest hold display number is the “newly received start winning command” As described below, the start winning command of the hold display number corresponding to each of the plurality of turned-on flags is set as the “newly received start winning command”, and the following processing is executed for each command. You may do it. Of the first start prize command and the second start prize command stored in the first start prize command buffer or the second start prize command buffer, which start prize command is “newly received start prize command” "Can be identified by the winning determination result designation command reception flag in the on state. For example, if the 1st-3 winning prize determination result designation command reception flag is on, the first starting prize command stored in the hold display number “3” of the first start prize command buffer is “newly received. If the second winning prize determination result designation command reception flag is ON, the second starting prize is stored in the hold display number “2” of the second starting prize command buffer. The command becomes “newly received start winning command”.

  If both the first winning determination result designation command reception flag and the second winning determination result designation command reception flag are off, and no new start winning command is received (step S90671; NO), Since the hold change effect is not executed, the hold change effect setting process is terminated.

  If a new start winning command is received (step S90671; YES), it is determined whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is “1” (step S90672). If the hold display number corresponding to the received start winning command is not “1” (step S90672; NO), the winning determination result specifying command included in the newly received start winning command is “no determination”. "Is specified as a determination result (step S90673).

  If the winning determination result specifying command does not specify “no determination” as the determination result (step S90673; NO), the pending change effect execution pattern is stored in the first starting winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674), and if neither the hold change effect execution pattern nor the action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674: NO), the hold change effect is stored. Whether to execute or not is determined (step S90675). In step S90675, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the hold change effect is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

  In step S 90675, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR 1 ′ for determining whether to execute the hold change effect updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random value SR1 ′, the presence or absence of execution of the hold change effect is determined with reference to the hold change effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the on-hold change effect execution determination table, for example, “with execution” or “execution”, which is a determination result in a range in which the numerical value compared with the random value SR1 ′ differs depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command, It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of “no execution”. In the hold change effect execution determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 holds the change effect if the determination result assigned to the determination value that matches the random value SR1 ′ extracted this time according to the winning determination result is “executed”. Is determined to be executed, and if “not executed”, it is determined not to execute the hold change effect.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 57, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, the hold change effect is more easily executed than when the winning determination result is “lost”. On the other hand, when the winning determination result is “losing”, the opposite is true. For this reason, when the hold change effect is executed, the big hit expectation degree of the variable display of the target is higher than when it is not executed.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the effect effect is executed (step S90676). Here, the action effect is an effect whether or not a predetermined image acts on the hold display image. The action effects include an action success effect in which the predetermined image acts on the hold display image, and an action failure effect in which the predetermined image does not act on the hold display image.

  In this embodiment, as the action effect, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated, and the image of the arrow shot by the predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 is applied to the hold display image. The effect of no is executed. In this embodiment, an action success effect in which an arrow shot on a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 hits the hold display image, and a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 is shot. It is possible to execute an action failure effect in which the arrow does not hit the hold display image. When the action success effect is executed, the hold change effect is executed and the mode of the hold display image is changed. When the action failure effect is executed, the hold change effect is not executed and the hold display image is displayed. The aspect of is not changed.

  In step S90676, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the effect is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

  In step S90676, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR2 ′ for determining whether or not the effect effect is updated, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, based on the random value SR2 ′, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect is determined with reference to the action effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the action effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random value SR2 ′ is [2] or [3] or [4] as the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result “executed” or “not executed” as the determination result within a different range depending on whether or not the pending change effect is executed. In the action effect execution determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2] in the determined value that matches the random value SR2 ′ extracted this time [3]. ] Or [4] and if the determination result assigned according to whether or not the pending change effect is executed is “executed”, it is determined to execute the effect effect, and if “not executed”, the effect effect is determined. Decide not to execute.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 58, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2], the effect is not executed. In addition, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] or [4] and the hold change effect is “executed”, the hold change effect is “not executed” It is easier to execute the effect. On the other hand, when the hold change effect is “no execution”, the opposite is true. For this reason, when the action effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the hold change effect is executed is higher than when the action effect is not executed.

  Thereafter, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the hold change effect in step S90675 (step S90677), and when it is executed (step S90677; YES), the pattern is to execute the hold change effect. A hold change effect execution pattern is determined (step S90678). If it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not to be executed, in step S90678, for example, the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. Specifically, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is “2”, the hold change effect pattern is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is “3”, the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. When the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is “4”, the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the pending change effect execution pattern is stored in the first start prize command buffer or the second start prize command buffer, and the special game before the target is executed together with the corresponding start prize command. Is shifted to the higher rank of the hold display number. The hold change effect execution pattern not accompanied by the action effect specifies the hold display number when executing the hold change effect and the mode of change of the hold display image at that time, and the hold change effect execution pattern HP1 ′. -1 to HP1'-2, HP2'-1 to HP2'-2, and HP3'-1 to HP3'-2 are prepared.

  For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP1′-1 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1]. This is a hold change effect execution pattern for changing the display color of the target hold display image from white to green.

  For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP2′-2 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. In the variable display executed when the display color of the target hold display image is changed from white to green and the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1], the hold change effect is again displayed. Is a hold change effect execution pattern in which the display color of the target hold display image is changed from green to red.

  For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP3′-1 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [3]. In the variable display executed when the display color of the target hold display image is changed from white to green and the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] and [1]. This is a hold change effect execution pattern in which the display color of the target hold display image remains green without executing the hold change effect again.

  If it is determined in step S90676 to execute the action effect, in step S90678, for example, a hold change effect execution pattern is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. Specifically, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is “3”, the hold change effect pattern is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is “4”, the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  The hold change effect execution pattern with the action effect includes a hold display number when executing the hold change effect, a mode of change of the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 at that time, and a mode of change of the hold display image at that time. Are designated, and hold change effect execution patterns HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-1 to HP7 '. -2 is prepared.

  For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP4′-1 is a variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. Is turned diagonally from the vertical and the action failure effect is executed, the display color of the target hold display image remains white without executing the hold change effect, and the hold change effect execution pattern is set to the hold display number [ In the variable display executed when shifting to the storage area corresponding to [1], the action success effect is executed by rotating the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 from the diagonal to the side, and then the hold change effect is executed. This is a hold change effect execution pattern for changing the display color of the target hold display image from white to green.

  For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP5′-2 is a variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. Rotate from side to side to execute the action success effect, then execute the hold change effect to change the display color of the target hold display image from white to green, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number. In the variable display executed when shifting to the storage area corresponding to [1], the action success effect is executed while the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 remains horizontal, and then the hold change effect is executed again to execute the target change This is a hold change effect execution pattern for changing the display color of the hold display image from green to red.

  For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP7′-1 is a variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [3]. Rotate from side to side to execute the action success effect, then execute the hold change effect to change the display color of the target hold display image from white to green, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number. In variable display executed when shifting to the storage area corresponding to [2], after executing the action failure effect with the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 left vertical to horizontal, the hold change effect is not executed again. The display color of the target hold display image remains green, and the actual change change execution pattern is changed to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1]. In the variable display, the display of the target hold display image remains green without executing the hold change effect again after executing the action failure effect while keeping the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction. It is a change production execution pattern.

  In step S90678, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR3 ′ for determining the hold change effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, on the basis of the random value SR3 ′, with reference to any of the first hold change effect execution pattern determination table to the fifth hold change effect execution pattern determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, the hold change A production execution pattern is determined.

  The first hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2] when it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed. . In the first hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, a hold change that becomes a determination result in a range in which the numerical value compared with the random value SR3 ′ differs depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result designation command What is necessary is just to be allocated to production | presentation execution pattern HP1'-1 or HP1'-2.

  The second hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] when it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed. . In the second on-hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the on-hold change that becomes the determination result in a range in which the numerical value compared with the random value SR3 ′ differs depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command What is necessary is just to be allocated to production | presentation execution pattern HP1'-1, HP1'-2, HP2'-1, and HP2'-2.

  The third hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [4] when it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed. . In the third hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the hold change that becomes the determination result in a range in which the numerical value compared with the random value SR3 ′ differs depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command It is only necessary to be assigned to the production execution patterns HP1′-1, HP1′-2, HP3′-1, and HP3′-2.

  The fourth hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] when it is determined in step S90676 to execute the action effect. In the fourth hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the hold change that becomes the determination result in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random value SR3 ′ differs depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command It is only necessary to be assigned to the production execution patterns HP4′-1, HP4′-2, HP5′-1, and HP5′-2.

  The fifth hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [4] when it is determined in step S90676 to execute the action effect. In the fifth hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, a hold change that becomes a determination result in a range in which the numerical value compared with the random value SR3 ′ differs according to the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result designation command It is only necessary to be assigned to the production execution patterns HP6′-1, HP6′-2, HP7′-1, and HP7′-2.

  In each hold change effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the hold change effect execution patterns assigned to the decision value that matches the random value SR3 ′ extracted this time according to the winning determination result. It is determined as an effect execution pattern of the hold change effect.

  As can be seen from the determination ratios of FIGS. 59 and 60, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, the display color of the hold display image finally becomes “red”, and the hold change effect execution pattern becomes “green”. It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern, and when the determination result at the time of winning is “lost”, the hold change effect execution pattern in which the display color of the hold display image finally becomes “green” becomes “red” It becomes easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern. For this reason, when the hold change effect is executed, when the final display color of the hold display image becomes “green”, the big hit expectation degree of the target special figure game Is expensive. For this reason, the hold change effect in which the final display color of the hold display image is set to “red” is notified in advance that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the hold display image is set to “green” in the final display color. Although the change effect is lower than “red”, it predicts that the expected degree of jackpot is higher than when the hold change effect is not executed.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 60A, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, if the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation. The hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of “twice” is more easily selected than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of “once”. When the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display whose sub-image display device 9051 is in the horizontal orientation is “1 time” is “2 times”. ”Can be selected more easily than the on-hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display. For this reason, when the hold change effect accompanied by the effect effect is executed, if the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 corresponds to the variable display “once”. The target big game expectation is higher when it is in the horizontal direction over the period corresponding to the variable display of “twice” than in the horizontal direction.

  Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 60B, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, if the final display color of the held display image is the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation. The hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of “3 times” is more easily selected than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of “2 times”. When the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display with the sub-image display device 9051 in the landscape orientation of “2 times” is “3 times”. ”Can be selected more easily than the on-hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display. For this reason, when the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is executed, if the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 corresponds to the variable display of “twice”. The target big game expectation is higher in the case of landscape orientation over a period corresponding to variable display of “3 times” than in landscape orientation.

  For this reason, the sub-change display effect with the action effect that is turned sideways over the period corresponding to the variable display of “three times” by the sub-image display device 9051 notifies that the big hit expectation is the highest, and the sub-image display device 9051 Preliminary notice that the pending change effect with the effect effect that turns sideways over the period corresponding to the variable display of “twice” is lower than the case of “three times” but has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the case of “once” However, the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect in which the sub-image display device 9051 is landscaped over the period corresponding to the variable display of “one time” is lower than the case of “twice”, but the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is lower. Predict that the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

  When the hold change effect is not executed (step S90677; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is determined to execute the action effect at step S90676 (step S90679), and when it is executed (step S90679; YES), an action effect execution pattern that is a pattern for executing the action effect is determined (step S90680). In step S90680, for example, the action effect execution pattern is determined at a determination rate similar to the determination rate of the pending change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. For example, a pattern that defines only a change in the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the on-hold change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. 60 may be used as the action effect execution pattern.

  After step S90678 or S90680, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determined on-hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern in association with the newly received start prize command (step S90681). Thus, it is understood that the special game corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern is the target, and the hold change effect or action effect execution timing is determined by the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern. I understand.

  After step S90681, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [1] (step S90672; YES), the winning determination result specifying command specifies “no determination” as the determination result. (Step S90673; YES), when the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674; YES), or when neither the hold change effect nor the action effect is executed (step S90679; NO) ), A process for updating the display of the hold display image in response to the reception of a new start winning command (step S90682).

  In step S90682, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123, etc., it corresponds to the hold display number corresponding to the winning determination result designation command reception flag that is turned on. Then, the process of starting the display of the hold display image at the display position of the display area 905H is performed. As a result, the hold display image corresponding to the newly received start winning command is newly displayed. The hold display image is displayed as a hold display image corresponding to the newly reserved special game until the newly held special game is executed.

  The first hold display image displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold display number [1] of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning prize is the first start winning prize stored corresponding to the hold display number [1]. It corresponds to the command, and also corresponds to the hold data corresponding to the hold number [1] of the first special figure hold storage unit, the first special figure game executed by the hold data, and the like. The same applies to each first hold display image displayed at each display position corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the first start winning prize command buffer.

  The second hold display image displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold display number [1] in the second start winning command buffer is the second start winning prize stored corresponding to the hold display number [1]. It corresponds to the command, and also corresponds to the hold data corresponding to the hold number [1] of the second special figure hold storage unit, the second special figure game executed by the hold data, and the like. The same applies to each second hold display image displayed at each display position corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] to [4] in the second start winning command buffer.

  After step S90682, the on-hold change effect setting process ends. At this time, the state of each winning determination result designation command reception flag may be reset.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a change start designation command from the main board 9011 has been received. Note that this determination may be made based on whether or not the change start designation command reception flag controlled in the command analysis process is in an ON state. When the change start designation command has been received, the variable value of the effect process flag is set to “1” corresponding to the variable display start setting process in order to start the variable display of decorative symbols in synchronization with the start of the special figure game. After the update, the variable display start waiting process ends. If the variable start designation command has not been received, the variable display start waiting process is terminated as it is.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the final stop symbol in accordance with the current variable display variation pattern and variable display result (step S90321). The variation pattern may be specified based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area. The variable display result may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and stored in the display result designation command storage area.

  For example, when the variable display result is “losing” and the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of “non-reach” in which the decorative display variable display mode is not a reach mode, a non-reach combination is configured. The combination of the final stop symbols is determined as a combination of finalized symbols. When the variable display result is “losing” and the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern designating “reach”, the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined as the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined as the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols. A combination of each fixed decorative design is prepared in advance using a random number value updated by a random counter for presentation provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90124 or the RAM 90122 and a determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121. It is good to decide at random from the combination of the decided decorative design. Note that the same decorative design constituting the jackpot combination may be different depending on the jackpot type.

  After step S90321, the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect control pattern setting processing (step S90322). FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control pattern setting process. In the effect control pattern setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first shifts the stored contents of the first start prize command buffer or the second start prize command buffer (step S90901). Specifically, when the first variation start designation command is received, the first start winnings stored corresponding to the first hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the first start winning command buffer are stored. The hour command, the hold change effect execution pattern, or the action effect execution pattern is shifted to the first hold display numbers [1] to [3] having higher numbers, respectively. When the second variation start designation command is received, the second start winning command and the hold change stored corresponding to the second hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the second start winning command buffer The effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern is shifted to the second reserved display numbers [1] to [3] of the higher numbers.

  Next, the on-hold change effect execution pattern stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer to which the stored content is shifted is checked (step S90902), When an action effect execution pattern is stored, a hold display number designated by the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern, and an actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern Are the same, and it is confirmed whether it is necessary to execute the hold change effect or the action effect (step S90903).

  The hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern is the same as the actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern, and the hold display effect or action effect is executed. In the case of performing (step S90903; YES), an effect control pattern for executing a hold change effect for changing the hold display image in a change mode of the hold display image at the current hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern. The hold change that changes the hold display image in the change mode of the hold display image after the action effect is executed in the change mode of the sub-image display device 9051 at the hold display number of the current time specified by the hold change effect execution pattern. The current hold display set in the production control pattern or the production production execution pattern Setting the effect control pattern that performs the action effect in the manner of displacement of the sub image display device 9051 in No. (step S90904). For example, when the hold change effect execution pattern is HP3′-2 and the hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern after the shift is [3], the hold change effect that changes the hold display image from white to green is displayed. A production control pattern to be executed is installed. When the hold change effect execution pattern is HP3′-2 and the hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern after the shift is “1”, the hold change effect for changing the hold display image from green to red is executed. Set the production control pattern.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of hold change effect execution patterns or action effect execution patterns are not stored. However, as another embodiment, a plurality of hold change effect execution patterns or action effect execution patterns are stored. When executing a hold change effect and an action effect for each hold change effect execution pattern and action effect execution pattern, a plurality of hold change effects and effect control patterns for executing the action effects are set as the current use pattern. To do. At this time, the plurality of pending change effects and action effects may be executed simultaneously or sequentially.

  The on-hold display number specified by the on-hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern is different from the actual on-hold display number corresponding to the on-hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern, and the on-hold display effect or the action effect is not executed. In this case (step S90903; NO), or after step S90904, the presence / absence of execution of the call notice effect and the call notice effect execution pattern that is a pattern for executing the call notice effect when executing the call notice effect are determined ( Step S90905). The call notice effect is an effect in which a call screen of a predetermined character appears at the start of variable display of decorative symbols. In step S90905, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the call notice effect and the call notice effect execution pattern for executing the call notice effect are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

  The call notice effect execution pattern designates a mode of calling a predetermined character when the call notice effect is executed, and call notice effect execution patterns YP1′-1 and YP1′-2 are prepared.

  For example, the call notice effect execution pattern YP1′-1 is a call notice effect execution pattern for executing a call notice effect and calling a predetermined character “I don't want to do it”.

  For example, the call notice effect execution pattern YP1′-2 is a call notice effect execution pattern for executing a call notice effect and calling a predetermined character “Hey”.

  In step S90905, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether to execute the call notice effect updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter, and the call notice effect execution pattern when the call notice effect is executed. The numerical data indicating the random value SR4 ′ is extracted. Subsequently, on the basis of the random value SR4 ′, referring to the call notice effect execution determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, whether or not the call notice effect is executed, and the call notice in the case of executing the call notice effect A production execution pattern is determined.

  In the call notice effect execution determination table, for example, whether the numerical value to be compared with the random value SR4 ′ is different depending on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command, whether or not the call notice effect is executed as a determination result, What is necessary is just to be assigned to the call notice effect execution pattern YP1′-1 and YP1′-2 when executing the call notice effect.

  The effect control CPU 90120 indicates whether or not the call notice effect is assigned to the decision value that matches the random value SR4 ′ extracted this time according to the winning determination result in the call notice effect execution decision table, and the call notice effect. In the case of execution, one of the call notice effect execution patterns is determined as the effect execution pattern of the call notice effect when the current call notice effect is executed.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 63, when the variation pattern is “reach”, the call notice effect is more easily executed than when the variation pattern is “non-reach”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is “non-reach”, the opposite is true. For this reason, when the call notice effect is executed, the reach expectation degree that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes the predetermined reach mode is higher than when it is not executed.

  Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 63, when the variation pattern is “reach”, the call notice notice execution execution pattern becomes “I do n’t want to do”. It is easier to select than the performance execution pattern, and when the variation pattern is “non-reach”, the call for the given character is “I do n’t want to do it”. It is easier to select than the notice effect execution pattern. For this reason, when the call notice effect is executed, the reach expectation degree is higher when the call of the predetermined character becomes “Hey” than when the call of the predetermined character becomes “I don't want to do it”. For this reason, the call-for-notice production where the call for a given character is “Hey” is a notice that the reach expectation is the highest, and the call-for-notice production where the call for a given character is “I do n’t want to do it” , It is lower than “Nee ~”, but it is informed that the degree of reach expectation is higher than when the calling notice effect is not executed.

  After step S90905, it is determined whether the current variable display variation pattern specifies reach (step S90906).

  When the variation pattern of the current variable display specifies reach (step S90906; YES), it is determined whether to execute the count-up notice effect (step S90907). The count-up notice effect is an effect in which a predetermined character counts up. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect at the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  In step S90907, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR5 ′ for determining whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, based on the random value SR5 ′, whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect is determined with reference to a count-up notice effect execution determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121. In the count-up notice effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random value SR5 ′ differs depending on whether the current fluctuation pattern specifies execution of super reach or only execution of normal reach. It is only necessary to assign “executed” or “not executed” as a determination result within the range. In the count-up notice effect execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 designates the decision value that matches the random value SR5 ′ extracted this time, whether the current variation pattern designates super reach execution, or designates execution of only normal reach. When the assigned value is “executed” depending on whether or not it is executed, it is decided to execute the count-up notice effect. When the assigned result is “not executed”, the count-up notice effect is executed. Decide not to.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 64, when the super reach is executed, the execution ratio of the count-up notice effect is high, and when only the normal reach is executed, the execution ratio of the count-up notice effect is low. When the performance is executed, there is a high possibility of developing from normal reach to super reach.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether to execute the specific effect (step S90908). The specific effect is an effect of maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051, and it is possible to execute an effect in which the period during which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained vertically and the period during which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained horizontally are different. It is. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the specific effect at the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  In step S90908, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random value SR6 ′ for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, based on the random value SR6 ′, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is determined with reference to the specific effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the specific effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random value SR6 ′ varies depending on whether or not the call notice effect is executed and the effect execution pattern of the call notice effect when the call notice effect is executed. Thus, it is only necessary to be assigned to “executed” or “not executed” as the determination result. In the specific effect execution determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the call notice effect is executed and the execution of the call notice effect when executing the call notice effect to the determined value that matches the random value SR6 ′ extracted this time. When the determined value assigned according to the pattern is “executed”, it is determined to execute the specific effect, and when the determined determined value is “not executed”, it is determined not to execute the specific effect.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 65, when the call notice effect is executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is high. When the call notice effect is not executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is low, so the call notice effect is executed. When the event occurs, a specific effect is executed, and there is a high possibility that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways.

  In addition, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 65, when the call notice effect is executed, when the predetermined character's call is “I don't want to do it”, the execution rate of the specific effect is high, “Hey”. Since the execution ratio of the specific effect is low, the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display is performed when the call of the predetermined character is “I don't want to do it” when the call notice effect is executed. There is a high probability that the device 9051 will be in landscape orientation.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the specific effect in step S90907 (step S90909), and when executing the specific effect (step S90909; YES), the pattern for executing the specific effect is used. A specific effect execution pattern is determined (step S90910). In step S90910, for example, the specific effect execution pattern is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  The specific effect execution pattern specifies a period during which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction when executing the specific effect, and specific effect execution patterns TP1′-1 to TP1′-3 are prepared.

  For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 is a specific effect execution pattern that executes the specific effect and maintains the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction “1000 ms”.

  For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-2 is a specific effect execution pattern that executes the specific effect and maintains the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction “10000 ms”.

  For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 is a specific effect execution pattern that executes the specific effect and maintains the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction “15000 ms”.

  In step S90910, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR7 ′ for determining the specific effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, based on the random value SR7 ′, the specific effect execution pattern is determined with reference to the specific effect execution pattern determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121.

  In the specific effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 that becomes the determination result in a range in which the numerical value compared with the random value SR7 ′ differs depending on the variable display result specified by the display result specifying command. It is only necessary to be assigned to ˜TP1′-3.

  In the specific effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 displays any one of the specific effect execution patterns assigned according to the variable display result to the determined value that matches the random value SR7 ′ extracted this time. Determine as the execution pattern.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 66, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the specific effect execution pattern for which the sub image display device 9051 is maintained in the landscape orientation takes a long time to maintain the sub image display device 9051 in the landscape orientation. Is easier to select than the short specific effect execution pattern, and when the variable display result is “losing”, the specific effect execution pattern in which the time for maintaining the sub image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction is short is displayed on the sub image display device 9051. It is easier to select than the specific effect execution pattern that requires a long time to maintain in the landscape orientation. For this reason, when the specific effect is executed, the longer the time that the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction, the higher the expected degree of jackpot. For this reason, the specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction “15000 ms” notifies that the expectation of the big hit is the highest, and the specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction “10000 ms” is “15000 ms. However, the specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction of “1000 ms” is lower than maintaining “10000 ms”, although it is predicted that the jackpot expectation is higher than maintaining “1000 ms”. A notice is given that the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than when the specific performance is not executed.

  Thereafter, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 has been determined as the effect execution pattern of the current specific effect in step S90910 (step S90911), and is not the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1. (Step S90911; NO), a pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern that is a pattern for executing a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is determined (step S90912).

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, in response to the start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once, a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative pattern is started. It is possible to perform the effect display that is changed once again after the temporary stop until the predetermined time. The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. What is necessary is just the number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable in all of the areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, as an example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, a plurality of pre-set chances for a special combination of pseudo-ream opportunities A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lose combinations is displayed temporarily. A predetermined effect such as an image display as a re-variation effect may be executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. The re-variation effect is not limited to the image display on the screens of the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices. Good.

  As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, during the period of each variable display by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, it is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area. It may be controlled so that things increase one by one. In addition, during the period of each variable display, the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs may be controlled to change. .

  As a further example of the re-change effect different from the image display, the effect model provided inside or outside the game area is controlled to operate during the change display period by the variable display effect of the “pseudo-continuous”. May be. At this time, during each variable display period, the operation mode of the production model may be controlled to change, or the operation model among the plurality of production models may be controlled to change. .

  It may be controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the image display device 905 during each variable display period by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative pattern that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance is displayed temporarily stopped, a sound that becomes a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of effect models, display of effect images, sound effects It may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect combining a part or all of the outputs. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. When the production mode of the game changes, the possibility that a predetermined game value such as a big hit expectation degree is given or the possibility that the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player may be increased.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the decoration pattern is based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change once to three times. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display is started 2-4 times in succession. And when the number of pseudo-continuous times increases, the big hit expectation degree becomes higher than when the number of pseudo-continuous times is small. Further, the production ratio may be controlled so as to change depending on the number of pseudo-continuous operations. For example, “reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed twice, and “super reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times. Note that the number of pseudo-continuations in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed up to more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  In step S90912, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

  The quasi-continuous effect execution pattern specifies the number of quasi-continuations when executing the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect and the line of a predetermined character when ending the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect. The pseudo-continuous effect execution patterns GP1′-1 to GP1′-3 are prepared.

  For example, the pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern GP1′-1 executes a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” with a single pseudo-continuous number of times and ends the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a pseudo-continuous performance execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes “Peace!”.

  For example, the pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern GP1′-2 executes a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” with two pseudo-continuous times and ends the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a pseudo-continuous performance execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes “Chance!”.

  For example, the pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern GP1′-3 executes the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” with the number of pseudo-continuous times of 3 and ends the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a pseudo-continuous production execution pattern in which the line becomes “Amazing!”.

  In step S90912, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number value SR8 ′ for determining the pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, based on the random value SR8 ′, a pseudo continuous effect execution pattern is determined with reference to a pseudo continuous effect execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern determination table, for example, a numerical value to be compared with the random value SR8 ′ differs depending on whether the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-2 or the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-3 is determined. It is only necessary to be assigned to the pseudo-continuous effect execution patterns GP1′-1 to GP1′-3 that are the determination results.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 selects any one of the pseudo-continuous effect execution patterns assigned to the determined value matching the random value SR8 ′ extracted this time according to the specific effect execution pattern. It is determined as the effect execution pattern of the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 67, when the specific effect execution pattern “TP1′-3” with the highest expectation degree of jackpot is selected, a pseudo continuous effect execution pattern with a large number of pseudo consecutive times is easily selected. In the case of the specific effect execution pattern “TP1′-2” having a lower degree of jackpot expectation than the pattern “TP1′-3”, a pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern with a small number of pseudo-continuous operations is easily selected. For this reason, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the larger the number of pseudo-continuous times, the higher the expected degree of jackpot. For this reason, “3 times” re-variation production is executed, and the variable display production of “pseudo-ream” in which the line of the predetermined character at the end of the production is “Amazing!” Is predicted to have the highest expectation of jackpot Then, the “2 times” re-variation effect is executed, and the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect in which the dialogue of the predetermined character at the end of the effect is “Chance!”, The “3 times” re-change effect is executed. Although it is lower than when the “one-time” re-variation effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the “one-time” re-change effect is executed, and the “one-time” re-change effect is executed. The “pseudo-ream” variable display effect where the character's speech is “Peace!” Is lower than when the “twice” re-variation effect is executed, but more than when the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is not executed. Also foretell that the big hit expectation is high.

  Thereafter, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the count-up notice effect in step S90907 (step S90913). If there is an execution (step S90913; YES), the specific effect is executed and the sub-image is executed. A count-up notice effect execution pattern, which is a pattern for executing a count-up notice effect when the display device 9051 is maintained in the landscape orientation, is determined (step S90914). In step S90914, for example, the count-up notice effect execution pattern is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  The count-up notice effect execution pattern designates the number of counts by a predetermined character when executing the count-up notice effect, and count notice effect execution patterns YP2′-1 to YP2′-3 are prepared.

  For example, the count notice effect execution pattern YP2′-1 is a count notice effect execution pattern that executes a count notice effect and counts up to a count “3” by a predetermined character.

  For example, the count notice effect execution pattern YP2′-2 is a count notice effect execution pattern that executes a count notice effect and counts up to a count “4” by a predetermined character.

  For example, the count notice effect execution pattern YP2′-3 is a count notice effect execution pattern in which a count notice effect is executed and a predetermined character counts up to a count “5”.

  In step S90914, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR9 ′ for determining the count-up notice effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, based on the random value SR9 ′, the count-up notice effect execution pattern is determined with reference to the count-up notice effect execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121.

  In the count-up notice effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the count-up notice effect execution pattern that becomes the determination result within a range in which the numerical value compared with the random value SR9 ′ differs according to the variable display result specified by the display result specifying command. It may be assigned to YP2′-1 to YP2′-3.

  In the count-up notice effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 displays one of the count-up notice effect execution patterns assigned to the decision value that matches the random value SR9 ′ extracted this time according to the variable display result. It is determined as an effect execution pattern for the count-up notice effect.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 68A, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is easy to select a count-up notice effect execution pattern with a large number of counts by a predetermined character, and the variable display result is “ In the case of “losing”, a count-up notice effect execution pattern with a small number of counts by a predetermined character is easily selected. For this reason, when the count-up notice effect is executed, the greater the number of counts by a predetermined character, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot. For this reason, the count-up notice effect that counts up to a count of “5” by a predetermined character notifies that the expectation of the big hit is the highest, and the count-up notice effect that counts up to a count of “4” by a predetermined character is The count-up notice effect, which is lower than the count “5” but is expected to have a higher jackpot expectation than the count “3” and counts up to the count “3” by a predetermined character, is lower than the count “4”. Notice that the big hit expectation is higher than when the count-up notice effect is not executed.

  After step S90914, when the effect execution pattern of the current specific effect is the specific effect execution pattern “TP1′-1” (step S90911; YES), or when the count-up notice effect is not executed (step S90913; NO) ), A variable display effect according to the combination of the variation pattern and the determined final stop symbol is executed, and as a part of the variable display effect, the specific effect and the specific effect are executed, and the sub-image display device 9051 An effect control pattern capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that it has been turned sideways is set as the current use pattern (step S90915).

  When the specific effect is not executed (step S90909; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is determined to execute the count-up notice effect at step S90907 (step S90916), and when it is executed (step S90916; YES), a count-up notice effect execution pattern that is a pattern for executing the count-up notice effect when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical orientation without executing the specific effect is determined (step S90917). In step S90917, for example, processing similar to the processing in step S90914 is performed, and the count-up notice effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  As can be seen from the determination ratios of FIGS. 68A and 68B, when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal orientation, When the variable display result is “big hit” than when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical orientation without being executed, and when the variable display result is “big hit”, the count by the predetermined character is larger. The up notice effect execution pattern is easily selected, and when the variable display result is “losing”, the count up notice effect execution pattern with a small number of counts by a predetermined character is easily selected. For this reason, even if the count-up notice effect with the same count number by the predetermined character is expected, the big hit expectation of the count-up notice effect executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the landscape orientation The degree is higher than the big hit expectation degree of the count-up notice effect executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical orientation without executing the specific effect.

  After step S90917 or when the count-up notice effect is not executed (step S90916; NO), it is determined whether the current variable display variation pattern specifies super reach (step S90918).

  When the variable pattern of the current variable display designates super reach (step S90918; YES), whether or not the development effect is executed and the development effect that is a pattern for executing the development effect when the development effect is executed. An execution pattern is determined (step S90919). The development effect is an effect executed when developing from normal reach to super reach. In step S90919, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the development effect and the development effect execution pattern for executing the development effect are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

  The development effect execution pattern designates a mode of effect when the development effect is executed, and development effect execution patterns HP1′-1 and HP1′-2 are prepared.

  For example, the development effect execution pattern HP1′-1 is a development effect execution pattern in which the “first character” acts on the decorative design.

  For example, the development effect execution pattern HP1′-1 is a development effect execution pattern in which the “second character” acts on the decorative design.

  In step S90919, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the presence / absence of execution of the development effect updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter, and the development effect execution pattern for executing the development effect. The numerical data indicating the random number value SR10 ′ for use is extracted. Subsequently, based on the random value SR10 ′, with reference to the development stage execution execution determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, whether or not the development stage performance is executed, and the development stage when the development stage production is executed. A production execution pattern is determined.

  In the development effect execution determination table, for example, whether the numerical value compared with the random value SR10 ′ differs depending on the variable display result designated by the display result designation command, and whether or not the development effect that is the decision result is executed. It is only necessary to be assigned to the development effect execution patterns HP1′-1 and HP1′-2 when executing the development effect.

  The effect control CPU 90120 executes whether or not to execute the development effect assigned according to the variable display result to the decision value that matches the random value SR10 ′ extracted this time in the development effect execution determination table. In this case, any one of the development effect execution patterns is determined as the development execution effect execution pattern in the case of executing this development effect.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 69, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the development effect is more easily executed than when the variable display result is “lost”. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, the opposite is true. For this reason, when the development effect is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

  Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 69, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the development effect execution pattern in which the “second character” acts on the decorative design, and the “first character” acts on the decorative design. When the variable display result is “losing”, the development effect execution pattern in which the “first character” acts on the decorative pattern is displayed in the “second character” decoration. It is easier to select than the development effect execution pattern that affects the symbol. Therefore, when the development effect is executed, the big hit expectation is higher when the “second character” acts on the decorative design than when the “first character” acts on the decorative design. For this reason, the development stage where the “second character” acts on the decorative design is foretold that the expectation of the jackpot is the highest, and the development stage where the “first character” acts on the decorative design is “the first character” ”, But notice that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the development performance is not executed.

  After step S90919, if the current variable display variation pattern does not specify reach (step S90906; NO), or if the current variable display variation pattern does not specify super reach (step S90908; NO), the variation pattern or An effect control pattern that executes a variable display effect according to the determined combination of the final stop symbols and that does not execute a specific effect or the like is set as the current use pattern (step S90920).

  After steps S90915 and S90920, the effect control pattern setting process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 61, after step S90322, the effect control CPU 90120 initially sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure change time corresponding to the current change pattern in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, for example. It is set as a value (step S90323).

  Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 905 and the variation of the small design in the sub-image display device 9051 is performed. At this time, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123 based on the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in step S90322, the image Variations of decorative symbols are started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the display region of the display device 905, and the display region of the sub-image display device 9051 is displayed. It is only necessary to start small symbol variation in the small symbol display area 9051V.

  Thereafter, the display update setting of the hold display image is set (step S90325). For example, if the received variation start designation command is the first variation start designation command, the left area of the display area 905H is transmitted by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The leftmost first reserved display image of 905HA is erased, and each of the other first reserved display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left. For example, if the received variation start designation command is the second variation start designation command, the right area of the display area 905H is transmitted by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The leftmost second reserved display image of 905HB is erased, and each of the other second reserved display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left.

  As described above, the start winning time command is newly stored in the start winning time command buffer in response to the hold data being newly stored in the special figure holding storage unit when the special figure game is held. . At this time, a hold display symbol is added in step S90682. At the start of the special figure game, corresponding to the fact that one piece of the hold data is deleted from the special figure hold storage unit, the stored content of the start winning command is shifted in step S90901. At this time, one hold display symbol is deleted in step S90325, and the display positions of other hold display symbols are shifted. In this way, the hold display number and the hold number correspond to each other, the start winning command at the same number corresponds to the hold data and the special game corresponding to the hold data, and the same number. The hold display symbol at the display position corresponding to the hold display number is also supported.

  Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display process (step S90326), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect process, various control data are read from the effect control pattern determined in step S90171 in accordance with the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the decorative design is variable. Processing for performing various effects during display is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable symbol display result is completely stopped and displayed. Processing to be included. It should be noted that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the confirmed decorative design may be displayed in a completely stopped manner. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, the production control board 9012 side autonomously does not depend on the production control command from the main board 9011. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command has been received. If it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the effect control pattern for executing the big hit effect executed in the big hit gaming state is set as the usage pattern, and the value of the effect process flag is “4”. Update to "". At this time, a timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern set as the usage pattern is set in the effect control process timer, and this process ends.

  When it is determined that no hit start designation command has been received, it is determined whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed. For example, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effect control process timer, and it is determined whether the timer value obtained by subtracting 1 is “0”, thereby determining the elapse of the waiting time. If the timer value after subtraction of 1 is not “0”, the hit waiting designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed, so this processing is terminated. If the timer value after subtracting 1 is “0”, it means that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has elapsed, so it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “losing” The value of the production process flag is updated to “0”, and this process is terminated.

  The hit process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the hit processing, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1, and the same value as the timer value after decrementing 1 of the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Production operation control is performed based on production control execution data associated with the process timer determination value. By repeatedly executing step S90174 for each timer interruption, the execution of the effect corresponding to the big hit gaming state is realized.

  In the winning process, it is further determined whether or not a winning end designation command has been received. If no winning end designation command has been received, all round games have not ended, so the value of the effect process flag is not updated. The process is terminated during the hit. Further, when the winning end designation command is received, all the round games are ended, and therefore the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to step S90175 in order to start the ending effect. Update to 5 "and end the hit processing. At the time of this update, an effect control pattern for setting the ending is selected as a use pattern, and a timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer. The ending effect control pattern may be set in advance.

  The ending process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the ending period has elapsed. For example, the timer value of the production control process timer is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the data included in the production control pattern that is associated with the process timer judgment value that is the same value as the 1 subtracted timer value is an end code. To determine whether the ending period has elapsed.

  When the data included in the effect control pattern is not an end code and the ending period has not elapsed, the same value as the timer value after subtracting one of the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern Based on the production control execution data associated with the process timer determination value, the production operation control of the ending is performed, and this process ends. The execution of the ending effect is realized by repeatedly executing step S90175 for each timer interruption. When the data included in the effect control pattern is an end code, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value, this process is terminated. When the value of the production process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, various data such as the production control process timer, various flag states and counter values are reset as appropriate.

  Next, an example of an effect screen realized in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 76, the arrows displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, and the small symbol display area 9051V indicate that the decorative symbols are being variably displayed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 70, an example of an effect screen for a call notice effect, a specific effect, a notification effect, and a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect will be described.

  For example, if the call announcement effect execution pattern YP1′-1 is determined in step S90905 in FIG. 62, the character image CA (character CA) is displayed on the image display device 905 after starting the variable display of the decorative design, and “ An appealing notice effect calling “Takunai” is started (FIG. 70A).

  Thereafter, for example, if the variation pattern of the current variable display specifies reach, reach occurs in variable display of decorative symbols (FIG. 70 (B)).

  Thereafter, for example, if it is determined to execute the specific effect in step S90908 in FIG. 62, the character image CB (character CB) and the cliff image G (cliff G) are displayed on the sub-image display device 9051, and the image A specific effect in which the character image CC (three character CCs) is displayed on the display device 905 is started (FIG. 70C).

  After that, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from vertical to horizontal (FIG. 70D). At this time, in the sub-image display device 9051, the effect that the character CB jumps under the cliff G is executed in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction.

  Thereafter, according to the fact that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways, the fact that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways is notified by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided in the sub-image display device 9051. The notification effect is executed (FIG. 70 (E)). Further, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 being turned sideways, an effect of fighting the character CB and the three characters CC is executed.

  Thereafter, for example, if the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern GP1′-1 is determined in step S90912 of FIG. 62, the variable display of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped (FIG. 70 (F)). At this time, an effect is performed in which the character CB defeats one of the three characters CC.

  Thereafter, the first (last) pseudo continuous variation is started. For example, if the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-2 is determined in step S90910 in FIG. 62, the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction. In response to the passage of “10000 ms”, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIG. 70G). At this time, in the sub-image display device 9051, the effect that the character CB jumps on the cliff G is executed in accordance with the operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. In addition, in the image display device 905, an effect is performed in which the remaining two characters CC run away while the one character CC that has been defeated by the character CB has fallen.

  Thereafter, in response to the fact that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned vertically and the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is also ended, an effect in which the character CB emits a line “Peace!” Is executed (FIG. 70 (H )).

  Note that it is only necessary to execute an effect in which the character CB defeats the character CC one by one each time the pseudo continuous variation is repeated. In this case, for example, if three characters CC are displayed, there is a possibility that a maximum of three pseudo-variations may be executed. Thus, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations may be suggested.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of an effect screen for a specific effect and a notification effect will be described.

  For example, if it is determined in step S90908 in FIG. 62 to execute the specific effect, the character image CB (character CB) and the cliff image G (cliff G) are displayed on the sub-image display device 9051, and the image display device 905 is displayed. The specific effect in which the character image CC (three character CCs) is displayed is started (FIG. 71A).

  Thereafter, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (FIG. 71B). At this time, in the sub-image display device 9051, the effect that the character CB jumps under the cliff G is executed in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction.

  Thereafter, according to the fact that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways, the fact that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways is notified by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided in the sub-image display device 9051. A notification effect is executed (FIG. 71 (C)). Further, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 being turned sideways, an effect of fighting the character CB and the three characters CC is executed.

  Thereafter, for example, if the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 is determined in step S90910 of FIG. 62, the sub-image is displayed in accordance with the elapse of “1000 ms” after the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction. The display device 9051 is rotated from horizontal to vertical (FIG. 71D). At this time, in the sub-image display device 9051, the effect that the character CB jumps on the cliff G is executed in accordance with the operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction.

  Thereafter, in response to the fact that the sub-image display device 9051 is in the vertical orientation, an effect is produced in which the character CB emits a line “Muri-” (FIG. 71E).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, an example of the effect screen for the development effect will be described.

  For example, if the development effect pattern HP1′-2 is determined in step S90919 in FIG. 62, the decorative image that is the reach-losing combination temporarily stops (FIG. 72A), and then the second image is displayed on the sub-image display device 9051. The development effect in which the character image (second character CD) is displayed is started (FIG. 72 (B)).

  Thereafter, the second character CD moves from the sub image display device 9051 to the image display device 905 in response to the rotation of the sub image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the diagonal direction (FIG. 72 (C )).

  Thereafter, the second character CD acts on the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L, and an effect of changing to another decorative symbol is executed (FIG. 72D).

  Thereafter, the second character CD acts on the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R, and an effect of changing to another decorative symbol that is a reach combination is executed (FIG. 72 (E)). )).

  Thereafter, the second character CD acts on the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C, and the effect of resuming the variation of the decorative symbol in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C is executed. (FIG. 72 (F)).

  In this way, the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and the development effect is finished in response to the sub image display device 9051 being rotated from the oblique direction to the vertical direction (FIG. 72 (G)). It develops from normal reach to super reach (FIG. 72 (H)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, an example of the effect change effect screen and the effect effect effect screen will be described.

  When the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is “4”, for example, if the hold change effect execution pattern HP6′-2 is determined in step S90678 in FIG. 56, the left in the area 905HA The hold change effect is started with the hold display image T displayed at the fourth display position as a target (FIG. 73 (A)). At this time, the sub-image display device 9051 displays a character image CE (character CE).

  Thereafter, at the start of the next variable display, when one hold display symbol is deleted and the display position of the other hold display symbols is shifted, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the vertical direction to the diagonal direction, and the character CE is displayed. The action effect of shooting the arrow Y aiming at the target hold display image T is executed (FIG. 73 (B)).

  Thereafter, since the arrow Y does not hit the target hold display image T and the target hold display image T does not change, this action effect is an action failure effect (FIG. 73 (C)).

  After that, at the start of the next variable display, when one hold display symbol is erased and the display position of the other hold display symbols shifts, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the diagonal direction to the horizontal direction. Then, a notification effect that notifies that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided in the sub-image display device 9051 is executed (FIG. 73 (D)), and the effect effect is performed again. However, this action effect also fails, and the target hold display image T does not change (FIG. 73 (E)).

  Thereafter, at the start of the next variable display, when one hold display symbol is deleted and the display position of the other hold display symbols shifts, the effect is executed again (FIG. 73 (F)), and the arrow Y is the target. Since the target hold display image T is hit and the target hold display image T changes from white to red, this action effect is an action success effect (FIG. 73 (G)).

  Thereafter, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction, and the hold change effect ends (FIG. 73 (H)).

  Here, the game area includes a plurality of areas in which the area into which the game ball is to be shot can be changed by the player's selection. The left area with the left and right center of the game area as the boundary is called the left game area, the right area is called the right game area, and the game ball that is thrown in is either the left game area or the right game area To enter.

  Driving the game ball aiming at the left game area so that the game ball flows to the left game area is called “left-handed”, and driving the game ball aiming at the right game area so that the game ball flows to the right game area Is called “right-handed”. In other words, the game ball that is thrown by the player hitting left and right hits the game area. The left-handed game ball flows down the left game area. On the other hand, the game ball that has been hit to the right flows down the right game area. In this way, the player changes the area in which the game ball is to be shot by the player's selection, such as right-handed or left-handed, by changing the firing strength of the hitting ball launcher according to the amount of operation of the hitting operation handle. be able to. In addition, innumerable flow paths of game balls flowing down the left game area and the right game area are assumed.

  For example, when the special variable winning ball device 907 is provided in the right game area, the player should hit the right in the big hit game state. Therefore, in response to the variable display result being “big hit”, a right-handed instruction image S for instructing right-handedness is displayed above the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 (FIG. 74A). .

  Then, at the start of the round game in the big hit gaming state, the right-handed instruction image S is displayed and the speaker 908L, 908R performs notification with a voice prompting the right-handed (FIG. 74 (B)).

  Here, the right-handed instruction image S is obtained by displaying two arc-shaped arrow images around the character image “right-handed”. The arrow image faces clockwise and rotates around the character image clockwise. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 74C, even if the sub-image display device 9051 rotates clockwise, as shown in FIG. 74D, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counterclockwise. Even so, the arcuate arrow image pointing in the clockwise direction rotates clockwise, so that the player can specify that the player should make a right turn.

  As shown in FIG. 74A, the right-handed instruction image S displayed above the display area when the sub-image display device 9051 is vertically oriented is rotated 90 degrees clockwise by the sub-image display device 9051. When the screen is turned sideways, it is displayed on the right side of the display area as shown in FIG. Thus, even if the right-handed instruction image S for instructing right-handedness is displayed on the right side of the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 that is turned sideways, there is no misleading player.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), the right-handed instruction image S displayed above the display area when the sub-image display device 9051 is oriented vertically is 90 degrees counterclockwise. When rotated and turned sideways, it is displayed on the left side of the display area as indicated by a broken line in FIG. As described above, when the right-handed instruction image S for instructing right-handed is displayed on the left side of the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 in the landscape orientation, the right-handed instruction image S is instructed to be right-handed. It may lead to misunderstanding that left handing is instructed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the right-handed instruction image S is displayed above the display area when the sub-image display device 9051 is in the portrait orientation, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise. When the image is in landscape orientation, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 74D, the sub image display device in landscape orientation is in the same position as when the sub image display device 9051 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. The right-handed instruction image S is moved to the right side of the display area 9051 so as not to cause misunderstanding of the player.

  As shown in FIG. 75, it is also possible to execute an effect of rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then rotating it in the vertical direction a plurality of times during one variable display. In the example shown in FIG. 75, when the big hit gaming state is finished and the time-saving state is being controlled, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction to indicate that the time-saving control is being performed. Notification is made (FIG. 75A). Then, when the specific effect is executed during the time reduction control, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIGS. 75B to 75C) and then rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. The specific effect is executed by moving it (FIGS. 75C to 75E). Then, in response to the end of the specific effect, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIGS. 75E to 75F). Thereafter, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction in order to notify that the time reduction control is being performed again (FIGS. 75F to 75H).

  As shown in FIG. 76, an error notification image E for notifying the occurrence of an error may be displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 in response to the occurrence of an error. In that case, the display position of the error notification image E is the position where the entire error notification image E can be visually recognized without shifting the display position of the error notification image E when the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 is changed, or Even when a part of the error notification image E protrudes outside the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 and becomes invisible or difficult to view, the notification content of the error notification image E is set to a position that can be specified.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  (Modification 1) In the above embodiment, the sub-image display device 9051 has been described as being rotatable in the vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions. However, the display device is not limited to the above embodiment as long as it can be displaced into a plurality of states. For example, the sub-image display device 9051 may be movable to a first position and second positions above, below, right, and left of the first position. The sub-image display device 9051 includes two first sub-image display devices 9051A and a second sub-image display device 9051B, and the first sub-image display device 9051A and the second sub-image display device 9051B are combined. Alternatively, the first state and the second state in which the first sub-image display device 9051A and the second sub-image display device 9051B are separated may be displaceable. Further, the image display device 905 may be displaceable into a plurality of states, and the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051 may be displaceable into a plurality of states. Such a configuration can be applied to various display devices.

  (Modification 2) In the above embodiment, the sub image display device 9051 performs an effect in which the character CB jumps under the cliff G in accordance with the movement of the sub image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. A description has been given of what performs the effect of the character CB jumping up on the cliff G in accordance with the operation of turning from landscape to portrait. However, the display device displays a predetermined image in association with the movement from the first state to the second state, and displays a specific image in association with the movement from the second state to the first state. What is necessary is just and it is not restricted to the said embodiment. For example, the aura of a predetermined character image increases in relation to the movement of the display device from the first state to the second state, and the predetermined aura of the display device shifts from the second state to the first state. The background image moves in the first direction in relation to the character image having a smaller aura or the movement of the display device from the first state to the second state, and the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state. The background image may move in a second direction opposite to the first direction in relation to the operation. Thus, the predetermined image displayed in association with the movement of the display device from the first state to the second state, and the operation of the display device in relation to the displacement from the second state to the first state are displayed. The specific image may be an image that is related to each other. According to such a structure, the production | presentation accompanying the displacement of a display apparatus can be diversified.

  (Modification 3) In the above-described embodiment, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is produced in connection with the operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 in the specific effect further rotates in the vertical direction after rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the sub-image display device 9051 is in the vertical orientation at the start of the specific effect, that is, there is no line of a predetermined character at the start of the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, and the sub-image display device 9051 at the end of the specific effect. In the above description, it is assumed that an effect accompanied by a predetermined character line is executed at the end of the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”. However, in connection with the operation of the display device being further displaced to the first state after being displaced from the first state to the second state, the first state before the displacement to the second state and the state after the displacement to the second state What is necessary is just to differ in the aspect of production with the 1st state, and it is not restricted to the thing of the said embodiment. For example, different effects may be displayed in the first state before the displacement to the second state and the first state after the displacement to the second state, or before the displacement to the second state. Different sound effects may be output in the first state and the first state after the displacement to the second state. According to such a structure, the interest of the production accompanying the displacement of the display device can be improved.

  (Modification 4) In the above-described embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern is determined according to the period in which the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of execution of the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations are defined for each fluctuation pattern, and the “pseudo-continuous” variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 9011 side. However, the period for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the landscape orientation may be determined according to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations or the variable display time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the setting associated with the execution of the specific effect on the effect control board 9012 side.

  (Modification 5) In the above-described embodiment, the effect of maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 has been described as the specific effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a specific effect, one that maintains the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909, one that maintains the sound output mode of the speakers 908L and 908R, or one that maintains the display mode of a predetermined image displayed on the image display device 905 Etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to various specific effects in which the aspect of the effect is maintained.

  (Modification 6) In the above embodiment, in the effect, the effect that the predetermined image hits the hold display image is set as the action success effect, and the effect that the predetermined image does not hit the hold display image is set as the action failure effect. However, “the predetermined image acts on the hold display image” is not limited to the case where the predetermined image hits the hold display image. For example, both the action success effect and the action failure effect are effects in which an arrow shot by a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 hits the hold display image. An effect may be executed in which the effect of being skipped or broken is executed, and such an effect is not executed in the effect of success. In this way, in the action effect, it is only necessary that the effect modes of the action success effect and the action failure effect are different, the hold change effect is executed after the action effect, and the mode of the hold display image is changed. Assume that the action effect is an action effect, and that the action effect is an action failure effect because the hold change effect is not executed after the action effect and the mode of the hold display image does not change. According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the effect effect is not limited, and the interest of the effect effect can be improved.

  (Modification 7) In the above embodiment, the first operation in which the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 is displaced from the vertical orientation to the lateral orientation, and the second operation in which the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 is displaced from the lateral orientation to the vertical orientation. However, although what was performed as a series of operation | movement by specific effect was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this. For example, for example, an effect of displacing the display device from the first state to the second state as the first effect, and an effect of displacing the display device from the second state to the first state as a second effect different from the first effect. The first operation in which the display device is displaced from the first state to the second state and the second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state are performed as a series of operations. It does not have to be. In that case, even if the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed, or the jackpot expectation is varied according to the timing at which the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved even if the first operation and the second operation of the display device are not executed as a series of operations.

  (Modification 8) In the above embodiment, the first operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated counterclockwise from the vertical state and displaced to the horizontal state, and the sub-image display device 9051 is in the horizontal state. Although the first operation and the second operation have been described in the same manner as the second operation in which the first operation is rotated clockwise and displaced to the vertical state, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the first operation, the display device is continuously displaced from the first state to the second state, and in the second operation, the display device is intermittently displaced from the second state to the first state. The first operation in which the device is displaced from the first state to the second state may be completely different from the second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state. In addition, the operation mode of the first operation and the operation mode of the second operation may each be executed in a plurality of modes. In that case, the operation mode of the first operation is any mode, the operation mode of the second operation is any mode, or a combination of the operation mode of the first operation and the operation mode of the second operation. Accordingly, the degree of expectation of jackpot may be varied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract more attention to the operation of the display device, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  (Modification 9) In the above-described embodiment, in the first operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated counterclockwise from the vertical state and displaced to the horizontal state, an image in which the character jumps under the cliff is displayed. In the second operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 is displayed and the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated clockwise from the horizontal state and displaced to the vertical state, an image in which the character jumps over the cliff is displayed. Not limited to this. A predetermined image displayed in association with the first operation in which the display device is displaced from the first state to the second state and a second image in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state are displayed. The specific image may be an image in which any one of a plurality of aspects is displayed. In that case, which aspect the predetermined image displayed in relation to the first action is, which aspect the specific image displayed in relation to the second action is, or the aspect of the predetermined image Depending on the combination with the mode of the specific image, the big hit expectation degree may be varied. Further, when the mode of the first operation or the mode of the second operation is any one of a plurality of modes as in the modification example 8, the predetermined image or the specific image is changed depending on the mode of the operation. The ratio of which aspect is obtained may be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract more attention to the predetermined image and the specific image, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  (Modification 10) In the above embodiment, in the small symbol display area 9051V, for example, a display mode in which all of a plurality of types of decorative symbols such as a symbol indicating a number in the same manner as a portion indicating a number in a decorative symbol are common. In the above description, the effect image indicating a plurality of types of small symbols each identifiable is variably displayed as the notification information image. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, during the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the time when a definite decorative symbol that is the display result is derived, the variable display mode of decorative symbols becomes a predetermined reach mode, or a pseudo combination of special combinations. Even in the case where a decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as a chance and a special symbol such as “re” is temporarily displayed, the small symbol display area 9051V displays the effect image indicating the small symbol as a reach mode. Alternatively, a display similar to that during high-speed fluctuation may be performed without using a pseudo-ream chance or a special symbol. Then, when the finalized decorative symbol is derived, an effect image showing the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that is common to all of the finalized decorative symbols. In other words, in the small symbol display area 9051V, it is possible to execute an effect to the extent that the player can grasp whether or not the variable display is being performed based on the effect image indicating the small symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the variable display effect by the effect image indicating the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9051V.

  (Modification 11) In the above-described embodiment and Modification 1, the display device composed of, for example, an LCD has been described as being displaced. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to an accessory that performs display using an LED, or an accessory called a versatile lighter that rotates or reciprocates LEDs arranged in a row to display characters and figures as an afterimage of light. In this case, for example, taking a versatile writer as an example, a predetermined image is displayed as an afterimage of light in relation to the first operation in which the versatile writer is displaced from a stationary state to a rotational state having a predetermined rotational speed, and the versatile writer has a predetermined rotational speed. The specific image may be displayed as an afterimage of light in association with the second operation that is displaced from the rotating state to the stationary state. As described above, the present invention is not limited to a display device including an LCD or the like, and can be applied to a gaming machine including various display devices.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control CPU 90120 of the change pattern indicating the variable display mode such as the variable display time of the decorative design and the type of reach effect, one change pattern when starting the variable display. Although an example in which the designation command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command as a variable before the reach, such as presence / absence of variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-continuous”. A command indicating the display time and the variable display mode is transmitted, and a command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode after reaching the reach, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect, is transmitted as the second command. You may do it. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable display time derived from the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 90120 selects a specific variable display mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or the second command is sent after a predetermined time has passed after the first command is sent. You may make it do. In addition, the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored and prepared in advance as the variation pattern designation command.

  The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that can perform a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols as a plurality of types of identification information, and can give a predetermined game value based on the game result, more specifically, A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, and a display result of a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable is derived and displayed This is a gaming machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above embodiment has the feature that hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine cooperate with software that performs predetermined processing. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that all or one part may be provided.

  In addition to this, various types of game machines including device configuration and data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart, image display operation in the image display device, sound output operation in the speaker, and lighting operation in the game effect lamp and decoration LED are also included. The production operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. Alternatively, it may be distributed in advance by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios in a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, It is a concept that includes those having different ratios such as A: B = 100%: 0%.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine controlled to the probable state after the big hit game is shown based on the fact that the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus having a predetermined probability variation area inside is provided, and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball apparatus during the big hit game. The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probable state after completion.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols “1” to “8” are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed has been shown. Not limited to. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In addition, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of the random numbers or changing the update range of the random numbers.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 9011 stores a random value determination table, and the main board 9011 stores the random value determination table based on the random value extracted in the main board 9011 at the time of starting winning. With reference to the example, the random number determination process is executed, and the effect control board 9012 receives the determination result determined in the main board 9011, and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the random value determination table, and the effect control board 9012 receives the random value itself extracted from the main board 9011 from the main board 9011, and based on the received random number value. The random value determination process may be executed with reference to the random value determination table, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 9012. The random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of random number values and execute a random number determination process, and may receive a determination result determined in the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the presentation control board 9012 receives a random number value, determines whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, determines the type of jackpot, and based on the random value, the main board 9011. The determination result of the variation pattern type determined in (1) may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 9011.

  In the above embodiment, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated on the side of the effect control board 9012 when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. As explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an interrupt for receiving a presentation control command may be generated by an interrupt request using the first bit of serial communication.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is a specification that maintains the aspect of the performance. A specific effect means capable of executing an effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a specific effect for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051), and the period for maintaining the first mode as the specific effect (sub It is possible to execute an effect in which the period in which the image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction) and the period in which the second mode is maintained (the period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction) can be executed, and the second mode is maintained. The degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on the length of the period of time (for example, when the specific effect is executed, the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The longer the time that is, the higher the jackpot expected level, and the like). Thereby, it can be made to pay attention also to the period when the mode of production is maintained.

  In addition, when the second aspect is maintained, other effects with high expectation controlled to the advantageous state are more easily performed than when the first aspect is maintained (for example, Even if the count-up notice effect is the same as the count number by the predetermined character, the big hit expectation degree of the count-up notice effect executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the landscape orientation is The higher than the big hit expectation degree of the count-up notice effect executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical orientation without executing the specific effect). Thereby, when another aspect is performed when the aspect of a specific effect is maintained by the 2nd aspect, the expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state can be raised.

  Further, a notification effect means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the aspect of the specific effect is the second aspect (for example, a notification effect for notifying that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways can be executed. And an effect control CPU 90120 and the like. Thereby, it can be made easy to recognize that the aspect of the specific effect has become the second aspect.

  Further, as the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect that changes stepwise from the first mode to the second mode in response to a plurality of variable displays (for example, a hold change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. 60). HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-1 to HP7'-2, etc.). Thereby, interest can be improved over a plurality of variable displays.

  In addition, it further includes predetermined effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a call notice effect) that can execute a predetermined effect of a plurality of modes, and depending on which mode of the predetermined effect is executed, The ratio in which the mode of the specific effect is the second mode is different (for example, when the call notice effect is executed, the specific effect is executed when the call of the predetermined character is “I don't want to do it” And there is a high possibility that the sub-image display device 9051 will be in landscape orientation). Thereby, attention can be paid to a predetermined effect.

  Further, during one variable display, an effect that changes to the first mode after changing from the first mode to the second mode can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. An effect of rotating the device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then to the vertical direction is executed a plurality of times during one variable display). Thereby, the interest in one variable display can be improved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4A 1st special symbol display 4B 2nd special symbol display 5 Production display device 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 100 Microcomputer 103 for game control CPU
120 CPU for effect control
901 Pachinko machine 902 Game board 903 Gaming machine frame 904A Special symbol display device 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L Speaker 908R Speaker 909 Game effect Lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Audio control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A First start port switch 9022B Second start port switch 9023 Count switch 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101 ROM
90102 RAM
90103 CPU
90104 Random number circuit 90105 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90121 ROM
90122 RAM
90123 Display control unit 90124 Random number circuit 90125 I / O

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Production display means;
Detection means capable of detecting the player's movement;
Production control means for controlling the execution of the game-related production,
The effect control means suggests that the action effect is displayed on the effect display means based on the fact that the action display for the player is displayed on the effect display means and the action of the player is detected, and that the action effect is executed. It is possible to execute an operation suggestion effect that displays an operation suggestion display on the effect display means,
The motion suggestion effect includes a success pattern for performing the motion promotion display through a superimposed display after moving and displaying a plurality of the motion suggestion displays, and a failure emphasis display through a superimposed display after moving the plurality of the motion suggestion displays. Including failure patterns to do,
The period corresponding to the failure emphasis display in the failure pattern is longer than the period corresponding to the superimposed display in the failure pattern,
further,
A specific production means capable of executing a specific production that maintains the mode of production,
As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the period for maintaining the first mode and the period for maintaining the second mode are different,
A game machine characterized in that the degree of expectation controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player differs according to the length of the period for maintaining the second aspect. The production control means includes
After displaying a specific motion suggestion display, display the motion promotion display corresponding to the specific motion suggestion display and execute the motion effect,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the operation effect that does not correspond to the specific operation suggestion display can be executed while the specific operation suggestion display is displayed.